1: % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2: %
3: % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4: \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5: %
6: \def\texinfoversion{2024-02-10.22}
7: %
8: % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
9: %
10: % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
11: % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
12: % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
13: % License, or (at your option) any later version.
14: %
15: % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
16: % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
17: % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
18: % General Public License for more details.
19: %
20: % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
21: % along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
22: %
23: % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
24: % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
25: % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
26: % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
27: %
28: % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
29: % reports; you can get the latest version from:
30: % https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
31: % https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
32: % https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
33: % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
34: % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
35: %
36: % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a
37: % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
38: % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
39: %
40: % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
41: % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
42: % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
43: % tex foo.texi
44: % texindex foo.??
45: % tex foo.texi
46: % tex foo.texi
47: % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
48: % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
49: % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
50: % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
51: %
52: % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
53: % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
54: % full Texinfo distribution.
55: %
56: % The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
57:
58:
59: \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
60:
61: % LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for
62: % are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex.
63: \def\typeout{\immediate\write17}%
64:
65: \chardef\other=12
66:
67: % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
68: % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
69: \let\+ = \relax
70:
71: % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
72: \let\ptexb=\b
73: \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
74: \let\ptexc=\c
75: \let\ptexcomma=\,
76: \let\ptexdot=\.
77: \let\ptexdots=\dots
78: \let\ptexend=\end
79: \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
80: \let\ptexexclam=\!
81: \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
82: \let\ptexgtr=>
83: \let\ptexhat=^
84: \let\ptexi=\i
85: \let\ptexindent=\indent
86: \let\ptexinsert=\insert
87: \let\ptexlbrace=\{
88: \let\ptexless=<
89: \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
90: \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
91: \let\ptexplus=+
92: \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
93: \let\ptexrbrace=\}
94: \let\ptexslash=\/
95: \let\ptexsp=\sp
96: \let\ptexstar=\*
97: \let\ptexsup=\sup
98: \let\ptext=\t
99: \let\ptextop=\top
100: {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
101:
102: % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
103: % starts a new line in the output.
104: \newlinechar = `^^J
105:
106: % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
107: % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
108: %
109: \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
110: \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
111: \else
112: \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
113: \fi
114:
115: % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
116: \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
117: \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
118: \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
119: \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
120: \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
121: \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
122: \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
123: \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
124: \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
125: \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
126: \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
127: \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
128: \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
129: \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
130: \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
131: \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
132: \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
133: \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
134: \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
135: \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
136: %
137: \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
138: \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
139: \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
140: \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
141: \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
142: \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
143: \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
144: \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
145: \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
146: \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
147: \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
148: \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
149: %
150: \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
151: \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
152: \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
153: \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
154: \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
155:
156: % Give the space character the catcode for a space.
157: \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
158:
159: % Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character.
160: \def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax}
161:
162: \chardef\dashChar = `\-
163: \chardef\slashChar = `\/
164: \chardef\underChar = `\_
165:
166: % Ignore a token.
167: %
168: \def\gobble#1{}
169:
170: % The following is used inside several \edef's.
171: \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
172:
173: % Hyphenation fixes.
174: \hyphenation{
175: Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
176: ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
177: data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
178: man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
179: par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
180: spell-ing spell-ings
181: stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
182: wide-spread wrap-around
183: }
184:
185: % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
186: % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
187: % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
188: % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
189: % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
190: %
191: \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
192: \def\loggingall{%
193: \tracingstats2
194: \tracingpages1
195: \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
196: \tracingparagraphs1
197: \tracingoutput1
198: \tracingmacros2
199: \tracingrestores1
200: \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
201: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
202: \tracingscantokens1
203: \tracingifs1
204: \tracinggroups1
205: \tracingnesting2
206: \tracingassigns1
207: \fi
208: \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
209: \errorcontextlines16
210: }%
211:
212: % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
213: % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
214: % after all.
215: %
216: \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
217: \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
218:
219: % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
220: % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
221: %
222: \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
223: \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
224: \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
225: \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
226: \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
227: \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
228:
229: % Output routine
230: %
231:
232: % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
233: % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
234: % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
235: %
236: \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
237:
238: % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
239: % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
240: % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
241: %
242: % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
243: % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
244: %
245: % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
246: % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
247: % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
248:
249: % \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
250: % mark before the section break, and one after.
251: % In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs,
252: % and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs.
253: % Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
254: % section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
255: % from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
256: % @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
257: %
258: % See page 260 of The TeXbook.
259: \def\domark{%
260: \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}%
261: \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}%
262: \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
263: \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
264: \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}%
265: \mark{%
266: \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
267: \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
268: \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
269: }%
270: }
271:
272: % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
273: % \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
274: %
275: % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
276: % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
277: % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
278: % @setcolor (or @url etc.) between @contents and the very first @chapter.
279: \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
280: \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi
281: \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
282: }
283: \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
284: \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi}
285:
286: % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
287: \def\currentchapterdefs{}
288: \def\currentsectiondefs{}
289: \def\currentsection{}
290: \def\prevchapterdefs{}
291: \def\prevsectiondefs{}
292: \def\currentcolordefs{}
293:
294: % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
295: \newdimen\bindingoffset
296: \newdimen\normaloffset
297: \newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight
298:
299: % Main output routine.
300: %
301: \chardef\PAGE = 255
302: \newtoks\defaultoutput
303: \defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
304: \output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
305:
306: \newbox\headlinebox
307: \newbox\footlinebox
308:
309: % When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine
310: % is run several times, hiding the original value of \topmark. Hence, save
311: % \topmark at the beginning.
312: %
313: \newtoks\savedtopmark
314: \newif\iftopmarksaved
315: \topmarksavedtrue
316: \def\savetopmark{%
317: \iftopmarksaved\else
318: \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}%
319: \global\topmarksavedtrue
320: \fi
321: }
322:
323: % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
324: % \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer
325: % and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written
326: % to the auxiliary files.
327: %
328: \def\onepageout#1{%
329: \hoffset=\normaloffset
330: %
331: \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
332: \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
333: %
334: \checkchapterpage
335: %
336: % Make the heading and footing. \makeheadline and \makefootline
337: % use the contents of \headline and \footline.
338: \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars}
339: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
340: \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
341: \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
342: \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}%
343: %
344: {%
345: % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
346: % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
347: % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
348: % before the \shipout runs.
349: %
350: \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
351: \turnoffactive
352: \shipout\vbox{%
353: % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
354: \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
355: %
356: \unvbox\headlinebox
357: \pagebody{#1}%
358: \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
359: % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
360: % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
361: % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
362: \vskip 24pt
363: \unvbox\footlinebox
364: \fi
365: %
366: }%
367: }%
368: \global\topmarksavedfalse
369: \advancepageno
370: \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
371: }
372:
373: \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
374:
375: % Main part of page, including any footnotes
376: \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
377: {\catcode`\@ =11
378: \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
379: % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
380: \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
381: \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
382: \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
383: \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
384: \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
385: }
386:
387: % Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings.
388: \newif\ifchapterpage
389: \def\checkchapterpage{%
390: % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page
391: \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi
392: \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
393: %
394: \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
395: \let\curchaptername\thischaptername
396: %
397: \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
398: \chapterpagefalse
399: \else
400: \chapterpagetrue
401: \fi
402: }
403:
404: % Argument parsing
405:
406: % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
407: % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
408: % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
409: % For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
410: %
411: \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
412: \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
413: \def\argtorun{#2}%
414: \begingroup
415: \obeylines
416: \spaceisspace
417: #1%
418: \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
419: }
420:
421: {\obeylines %
422: \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
423: \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
424: \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
425: }%
426: }
427:
428: % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to
429: % \argremovespace.
430: \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
431: \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovespace#1$ $\ArgTerm}
432: % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, though; e.g.,
433: % @end itemize @c foo
434: % Note that the argument cannot contain the TeX $, as its catcode is
435: % changed to \other when Texinfo source is read.
436: \def\argremovespace#1 $#2\ArgTerm{\finishparsearg#1$\ArgTerm}
437:
438: % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
439: % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
440: % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it
441: % just before passing the control to \next.
442: % (But first, we have to remove the remaining $ or two.)
443: \def\finishparsearg#1$#2\ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
444:
445:
446: % \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
447: %
448: % \parseargdef\foo{...}
449: % is roughly equivalent to
450: % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
451: % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
452: \def\parseargdef#1{%
453: \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
454: }
455: \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
456: \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
457: \def#1##1%
458: }
459:
460: % Several utility definitions with active space:
461: {
462: \obeyspaces
463: \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
464:
465: % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
466: % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
467: % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
468: % should produce a line of output anyway.
469: %
470: \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
471:
472: % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
473: % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
474: % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
475: \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
476: }
477:
478:
479: \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
480:
481: % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
482: %
483: % \envdef\foo{...}
484: % \def\Efoo{...}
485: %
486: % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
487: % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
488: % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
489: % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
490: % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
491: %
492: % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
493: % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
494: % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
495: % special case.)
496:
497:
498: % At run-time, environments start with this:
499: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
500: % initialize
501: \let\thisenv\empty
502:
503: % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
504: \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
505: \long\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
506:
507: % Check whether we're in the right environment:
508: \def\checkenv#1{%
509: \def\temp{#1}%
510: \ifx\thisenv\temp
511: \else
512: \badenverr
513: \fi
514: }
515:
516: % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
517: \def\badenverr{%
518: \errhelp = \EMsimple
519: \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
520: not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
521: }
522: \def\inenvironment#1{%
523: \ifx#1\empty
524: outside of any environment%
525: \else
526: in environment \expandafter\string#1%
527: \fi
528: }
529:
530:
531: % @end foo calls \checkenv and executes the definition of \Efoo.
532: \parseargdef\end{%
533: \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
534: \else
535: % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
536: \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
537: \csname E#1\endcsname
538: \endgroup
539: \fi
540: }
541:
542: \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
543:
544:
545: % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
546: % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
547: % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
548: % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
549: % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
550: {\catcode`@ = 11
551: % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
552: % if the definition is written into an index file.
553: \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
554: \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
555: }
556:
557: % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
558: \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
559:
560: % @* forces a line break.
561: \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
562:
563: % @/ allows a line break.
564: \let\/=\allowbreak
565:
566: % @- allows explicit insertion of hyphenation points
567: \def\-{\discretionary{\normaldash}{}{}}%
568:
569: % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
570: \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
571:
572: % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
573: \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
574:
575: % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
576: \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
577:
578: % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
579: % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
580: % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
581: \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
582:
583: % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
584: % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
585: % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
586: % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
587: % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
588: % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
589: % the text is small, which looks bad.
590: %
591: % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
592: % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
593: % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
594: % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
595: % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
596: % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
597: %
598: \newbox\groupbox
599: \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
600: %
601: \envdef\group{%
602: \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
603: \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
604: \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
605: \fi
606: \startsavinginserts
607: %
608: \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
609: % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
610: % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
611: % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
612: % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
613: % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
614: % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
615: \comment
616: }
617: %
618: % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
619: % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
620: % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
621: % above. But it's pretty close.
622: \def\Egroup{%
623: % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
624: % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
625: \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
626: \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
627: \egroup % End the \vtop.
628: \addgroupbox
629: \prevdepth = \dimen1
630: \checkinserts
631: }
632:
633: \def\addgroupbox{
634: % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
635: \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
636: % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
637: \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
638: % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
639: % group, force a page break.
640: \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
641: \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight
642: \page
643: \fi
644: \fi
645: \box\groupbox
646: }
647:
648: %
649: % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
650: % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
651: %
652: \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
653: group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
654: where each line of input produces a line of output.}
655:
656: % @need space-in-mils
657: % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
658:
659: \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
660:
661: \parseargdef\need{%
662: % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
663: % paragraph.
664: \par
665: %
666: % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
667: \dimen0 = #1\mil
668: \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
669: \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
670: \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
671: % This is similar to the 'needspace' module in LaTeX.
672: % The first penalty allows a break if the end of the page is
673: % not too far away. Following penalties and skips are discarded.
674: % Otherwise, require at least \dimen0 of vertical space.
675: %
676: % (We used to use a \vtop to reserve space, but this had spacing issues
677: % when followed by a section heading, as it was not a "discardable item".
678: % This also has the benefit of providing glue before the page break if
679: % there isn't enough space.)
680: \vskip0pt plus \dimen0
681: \penalty-100
682: \vskip0pt plus -\dimen0
683: \vskip \dimen0
684: \penalty9999
685: \vskip -\dimen0
686: \penalty0\relax % this hides the above glue from \safewhatsit and \dobreak
687: \fi
688: }
689:
690: % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
691:
692: \let\br = \par
693:
694: % @page forces the start of a new page.
695: %
696: \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
697:
698: % @exdent text....
699: % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
700:
701: % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
702: % That's how much \exdent should take out.
703: \newskip\exdentamount
704:
705: % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
706: \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
707:
708: % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
709: \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
710: \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
711:
712: % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
713: % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
714: % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
715: %
716: \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
717: \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
718: %
719: \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
720: \nobreak
721: \kern-\strutdepth
722: \vtop to \strutdepth{%
723: \baselineskip=\strutdepth
724: \vss
725: % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
726: % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
727: \ifx#1l%
728: \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
729: \else
730: \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
731: \fi
732: \null
733: }%
734: }}
735: \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
736: \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
737: %
738: % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
739: % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
740: % else use TEXT for both).
741: %
742: \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
743: \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
744: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
745: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
746: \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
747: \def\righttext{#2}%
748: \else
749: \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
750: \def\righttext{#1}%
751: \fi
752: %
753: \ifodd\pageno
754: \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
755: \else
756: \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
757: \fi
758: \temp
759: }
760:
761: % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
762: %
763: \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
764: \def\includezzz#1{%
765: \pushthisfilestack
766: \def\thisfile{#1}%
767: {%
768: \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
769: \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
770: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
771: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
772: \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
773: %
774: % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
775: % definitions, etc.
776: \expandafter
777: }\temp
778: \popthisfilestack
779: }
780: \def\filenamecatcodes{%
781: \catcode`\\=\other
782: \catcode`~=\other
783: \catcode`^=\other
784: \catcode`_=\other
785: \catcode`|=\other
786: \catcode`<=\other
787: \catcode`>=\other
788: \catcode`+=\other
789: \catcode`-=\other
790: \catcode`\`=\other
791: \catcode`\'=\other
792: }
793:
794: \def\pushthisfilestack{%
795: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
796: }
797: \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
798: \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
799: }
800: \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
801: \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
802: }
803:
804: \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
805: \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
806: the stack of filenames is empty.}}
807: %
808: \def\thisfile{}
809:
810: % @center line
811: % outputs that line, centered.
812: %
813: \parseargdef\center{%
814: \ifhmode
815: \let\centersub\centerH
816: \else
817: \let\centersub\centerV
818: \fi
819: \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
820: \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
821: }
822: \def\centerH#1{{%
823: \hfil\break
824: \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
825: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
826: \line{#1}%
827: \break
828: }}
829: %
830: \newcount\centerpenalty
831: \def\centerV#1{%
832: % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
833: % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
834: % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
835: % prevent a page break here.
836: \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
837: \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
838: \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
839: \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
840: }
841:
842: % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
843: %
844: \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
845:
846: % @comment ...line which is ignored...
847: % @c is the same as @comment
848: % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
849:
850:
851: \def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
852: \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
853: \cxxx}
854: {\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
855: %
856: \let\comment\c
857:
858: % @paragraphindent NCHARS
859: % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
860: % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
861: % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
862: %
863: \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
864: \def\noneword{none}
865: %
866: \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
867: \def\temp{#1}%
868: \ifx\temp\asisword
869: \else
870: \ifx\temp\noneword
871: \defaultparindent = 0pt
872: \else
873: \defaultparindent = #1em
874: \fi
875: \fi
876: \parindent = \defaultparindent
877: }
878:
879: % @exampleindent NCHARS
880: % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
881: % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
882: % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
883: \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
884: \def\temp{#1}%
885: \ifx\temp\asisword
886: \else
887: \ifx\temp\noneword
888: \lispnarrowing = 0pt
889: \else
890: \lispnarrowing = #1em
891: \fi
892: \fi
893: }
894:
895: % @firstparagraphindent WORD
896: % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
897: % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
898: % paragraphs.
899: %
900: % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
901: % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
902: % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
903: % By default, we suppress indentation.
904: %
905: \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
906: \def\insertword{insert}
907: %
908: \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
909: \def\temp{#1}%
910: \ifx\temp\noneword
911: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
912: \else\ifx\temp\insertword
913: \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
914: \else
915: \errhelp = \EMsimple
916: \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
917: \fi\fi
918: }
919:
920: % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
921: % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
922: %
923: % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
924: % paragraph.
925: %
926: \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
927: \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
928: \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
929: \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
930: }
931: %
932: \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
933: \global\let\indent = \ptexindent
934: \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
935: \global\everypar = {}%
936: }
937:
938: % leave vertical mode without cancelling any first paragraph indent
939: \gdef\imageindent{%
940: \toks0=\everypar
941: \everypar={}%
942: \ptexnoindent
943: \global\everypar=\toks0
944: }
945:
946:
947: % @refill is a no-op.
948: \let\refill=\relax
949:
950: % @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
951: \let\setfilename=\comment
952:
953: % @bye.
954: \outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
955:
956:
957: \message{pdf,}
958: % adobe `portable' document format
959: \newcount\tempnum
960: \newcount\lnkcount
961: \newtoks\filename
962: \newcount\filenamelength
963: \newcount\pgn
964: \newtoks\toksA
965: \newtoks\toksB
966: \newtoks\toksC
967: \newtoks\toksD
968: \newbox\boxA
969: \newbox\boxB
970: \newcount\countA
971: \newif\ifpdf
972: \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
973:
974: %
975: % For LuaTeX
976: %
977:
978: \newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname
979: \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc.
980:
981: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
982: \else
983: % Use Unicode destination names
984: \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
985: % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8
986: \begingroup
987: \catcode`\%=12
988: \directlua{
989: function UTF16oct(str)
990: tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377')
991: for c in string.utfvalues(str) do
992: if c < 0x10000 then
993: tex.sprint(
994: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
995: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
996: math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256)))
997: else
998: c = c - 0x10000
999: local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800
1000: local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00
1001: tex.sprint(
1002: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
1003: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
1004: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
1005: string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
1006: math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256),
1007: math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256)))
1008: end
1009: end
1010: end
1011: }
1012: \endgroup
1013: \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
1014: % Escape PDF strings without converting
1015: \begingroup
1016: \directlua{
1017: function PDFescstr(str)
1018: for c in string.bytes(str) do
1019: if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then
1020: tex.sprint(-2,
1021: string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
1022: c))
1023: else
1024: tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c))
1025: end
1026: end
1027: end
1028: }
1029: % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12
1030: % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See
1031: % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html
1032: %
1033: \endgroup
1034: \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
1035: \ifnum\luatexversion>84
1036: % For LuaTeX >= 0.85
1037: \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest}
1038: \let\pdfoutput\outputmode
1039: \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal}
1040: \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog}
1041: \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
1042: \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource
1043: \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource
1044: \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex
1045: \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax}
1046: \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline}
1047: \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink}
1048: \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr}
1049: \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj}
1050: \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
1051: \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth
1052: \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight
1053: \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin}
1054: \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin}
1055: \fi
1056: \fi
1057:
1058: % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1059: % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
1060: \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
1061: \else
1062: \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1063: \else
1064: \ifcase\pdfoutput
1065: \else
1066: \pdftrue
1067: \fi
1068: \fi
1069: \fi
1070:
1071: \newif\ifpdforxetex
1072: \pdforxetexfalse
1073: \ifpdf
1074: \pdforxetextrue
1075: \fi
1076: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else
1077: \pdforxetextrue
1078: \fi
1079:
1080:
1081: % Output page labels information.
1082: % See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1.
1083: % Page label ranges must be increasing.
1084: \ifpdf
1085: \def\pagelabels{%
1086: \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}%
1087: %
1088: % support @contents at very end of document
1089: \ifnum\contentsendcount=\pagecount
1090: \ifnum\arabiccount<\romancount
1091: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums
1092: [\title
1093: \the\arabiccount << /S /D >>
1094: \the\romancount << /S /r >>
1095: ] >> }\relax
1096: \fi
1097: % no contents in document
1098: \else\ifnum\contentsendcount=0
1099: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums
1100: [\title
1101: \the\arabiccount << /S /D >>
1102: ] >> }\relax
1103: \else
1104: \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums
1105: [\title
1106: \the\romancount << /S /r >>
1107: \the\contentsendcount << /S /D >>
1108: ] >> }\relax
1109: \fi\fi
1110: }
1111: \else
1112: \let\pagelabels\relax
1113: \fi
1114:
1115: \newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0
1116: \newcount\romancount \romancount=0
1117: \newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0
1118: \newcount\contentsendcount \contentsendcount=0
1119:
1120: \ifpdf
1121: \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno
1122: \def\advancepageno{%
1123: \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1
1124: }
1125: \fi
1126:
1127:
1128: % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1129: % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
1130: % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1131: % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
1132: %
1133: % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
1134: % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
1135: % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1136: % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
1137: % do this reliably, so we use it.
1138:
1139: % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
1140: % which we \xdef.
1141: \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
1142: \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
1143: % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
1144: % Many times it won't matter.
1145: \xdef#1{#1}%
1146: \else
1147: % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
1148: % backslashes, and other special chars.
1149: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
1150: \fi
1151: }
1152: \def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{%
1153: \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined
1154: % No UTF-16 converting macro available.
1155: \txiescapepdf{#1}%
1156: \else
1157: \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}%
1158: \fi
1159: }
1160:
1161: \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1162: with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
1163: be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1164: output) for that.)}
1165:
1166: \ifpdf
1167: %
1168: % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
1169: % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1170: % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1171: % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
1172: % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
1173: % black by default, though.
1174: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1175: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1176: %
1177: % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1178: % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1179: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}}
1180: %
1181: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1182: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1183: \def\curcolor{0 0 0}%
1184: \def\setcolor#1{%
1185: \ifx#1\curcolor\else
1186: \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1187: \domark
1188: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
1189: \xdef\curcolor{#1}%
1190: \fi
1191: }
1192: %
1193: \let\maincolor\rgbBlack
1194: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1195: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1196: \def\currentcolordefs{}
1197: %
1198: \def\makefootline{%
1199: \baselineskip24pt
1200: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1201: }
1202: %
1203: \def\makeheadline{%
1204: \vbox to 0pt{%
1205: \vskip-22.5pt
1206: \line{%
1207: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
1208: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1209: \getcolormarks
1210: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1211: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1212: }%
1213: \vss
1214: }%
1215: \nointerlineskip
1216: }
1217: %
1218: %
1219: \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
1220: %
1221: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1222: \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1223: \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1224: \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1225: %
1226: % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1227: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1228: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1229: % bitmap.
1230: \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1231: \begingroup
1232: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1233: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1234: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1235: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1236: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1237: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1238: \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1239: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1240: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1241: \fi
1242: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1243: \fi
1244: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1245: \fi
1246: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1247: \fi
1248: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
1249: \fi
1250: \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1251: \fi
1252: \closein 1
1253: \endgroup
1254: %
1255: % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1256: % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1257: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1258: \immediate\pdfimage
1259: \else
1260: \immediate\pdfximage
1261: \fi
1262: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
1263: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
1264: \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1265: #1.\pdfimgext
1266: \else
1267: {#1.\pdfimgext}%
1268: \fi
1269: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1270: \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1271: \fi}
1272: %
1273: \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
1274: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1275: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1276: \indexnofonts
1277: \makevalueexpandable
1278: \turnoffactive
1279: \iftxiuseunicodedestname
1280: \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
1281: % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
1282: % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode.
1283: \else
1284: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
1285: % Pass through Unicode characters.
1286: \else
1287: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
1288: \passthroughcharsfalse
1289: \fi
1290: \fi
1291: \else
1292: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
1293: \passthroughcharsfalse
1294: \fi
1295: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1296: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1297: }}
1298: %
1299: \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
1300: \indexnofonts
1301: \makevalueexpandable
1302: \turnoffactive
1303: \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
1304: % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark
1305: % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for
1306: % the "PDFDocEncoding".
1307: \passthroughcharstrue
1308: % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
1309: % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode
1310: % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
1311: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1312: \else
1313: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
1314: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
1315: % For pdfTeX with UTF-8.
1316: % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings,
1317: % but the code for this isn't done yet.
1318: % Use ASCII approximations.
1319: \passthroughcharsfalse
1320: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1321: \else
1322: % For LuaTeX with UTF-8.
1323: % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts.
1324: \passthroughcharstrue
1325: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1326: \fi
1327: \else
1328: % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings.
1329: % Use ASCII approximations.
1330: \passthroughcharsfalse
1331: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1332: \fi
1333: \fi
1334: % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16
1335: % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
1336: \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext
1337: }}
1338: %
1339: \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
1340: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
1341: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1342: }
1343: %
1344: % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1345: \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1346: %
1347: % by default, use black for everything.
1348: \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
1349: \let\linkcolor\rgbBlack
1350: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1351: %
1352: % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1353: % come from Petr Olsak
1354: \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1355: \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1356: \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1357: \advance\tempnum by 1
1358: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1359: %
1360: % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1361: % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1362: % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
1363: % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1364: % #4 is the page number
1365: %
1366: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1367: % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1368: % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
1369: % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1370: % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1371: \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
1372: \setpdfdestname{#3}
1373: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
1374: \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
1375: \fi
1376: %
1377: \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1378: }
1379: %
1380: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1381: \begingroup
1382: % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1383: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1384: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1385: \def\thischapnum{##2}%
1386: \def\thissecnum{0}%
1387: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1388: }%
1389: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1390: \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1391: \def\thissecnum{##2}%
1392: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1393: }%
1394: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1395: \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1396: \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1397: }%
1398: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1399: \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1400: }%
1401: \def\thischapnum{0}%
1402: \def\thissecnum{0}%
1403: \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1404: %
1405: % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1406: % al. a second time, below.
1407: \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1408: \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1409: \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1410: \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1411: \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1412: \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1413: \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1414: \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1415: \readdatafile{toc}%
1416: %
1417: % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1418: % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1419: % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1420: %
1421: % We use the node names as the destinations.
1422: %
1423: % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
1424: % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
1425: % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
1426: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1427: \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1428: \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1429: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1430: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1431: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1432: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1433: \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1434: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1435: \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1436: %
1437: % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1438: % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1439: % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
1440: % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
1441: % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1442: %
1443: % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1444: % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
1445: % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
1446: % we use for the index sort strings.
1447: %
1448: \indexnofonts
1449: \setupdatafile
1450: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1451: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1452: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1453: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1454: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1455: \input \tocreadfilename
1456: \endgroup
1457: }
1458: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
1459: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
1460: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1461: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1462: ]
1463: %
1464: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1465: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1466: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1467: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1468: \advance\filenamelength by 1
1469: \fi
1470: \nextsp}
1471: \def\getfilename#1{%
1472: \filenamelength=0
1473: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1474: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1475: \edef\temp{#1}%
1476: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
1477: }
1478: \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1479: \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1480: \else
1481: \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1482: \fi
1483: % make a live url in pdf output.
1484: \def\pdfurl#1{%
1485: \begingroup
1486: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1487: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1488: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1489: % people have actually reported a problem with.
1490: %
1491: \normalturnoffactive
1492: \def\@{@}%
1493: \let\/=\empty
1494: \makevalueexpandable
1495: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1496: % special-casing \var here?
1497: \def\var##1{##1}%
1498: %
1499: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1500: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1501: user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1502: \endgroup}
1503: % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may
1504: % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index
1505: % entry.
1506: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1507: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1508: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1509: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1510: \def\maketoks{%
1511: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1512: \ifx\first0\adn0
1513: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1514: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1515: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1516: \else
1517: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1518: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1519: \let\next=\maketoks
1520: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1521: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1522: \fi
1523: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1524: \next}
1525: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1526: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1527: \def\pdflink#1{\pdflinkpage{#1}{#1}}%
1528: \def\pdflinkpage#1#2{%
1529: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1530: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#2\endlink}
1531: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1532: \else
1533: % non-pdf mode
1534: \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1535: \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1536: \let\endlink = \relax
1537: \let\setcolor = \gobble
1538: \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
1539: \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1540: \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1541:
1542: %
1543: % For XeTeX
1544: %
1545: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
1546: \else
1547: %
1548: % XeTeX version check
1549: %
1550: \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1
1551: % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307.
1552: % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941).
1553: % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special
1554: % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
1555: \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010}
1556: % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+.
1557: % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF.
1558: \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
1559: \else
1560: % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the
1561: % `dvipdfmx:config' special.
1562: % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement,
1563: % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary.
1564: %
1565: % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF
1566: % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue.
1567: % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
1568: \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse
1569: \fi
1570: %
1571: % Color support
1572: %
1573: \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1574: \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1575: %
1576: \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}}
1577: %
1578: % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1579: % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1580: \def\setcolor#1{%
1581: \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1582: \domark
1583: \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
1584: }
1585: %
1586: \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1587: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1588: \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1589: \def\currentcolordefs{}
1590: %
1591: \def\makefootline{%
1592: \baselineskip24pt
1593: \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1594: }
1595: %
1596: \def\makeheadline{%
1597: \vbox to 0pt{%
1598: \vskip-22.5pt
1599: \line{%
1600: \vbox to8.5pt{}%
1601: % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1602: \getcolormarks
1603: % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1604: \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1605: }%
1606: \vss
1607: }%
1608: \nointerlineskip
1609: }
1610: %
1611: % PDF outline support
1612: %
1613: % Emulate pdfTeX primitive
1614: \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{%
1615: \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}%
1616: }
1617: %
1618: \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
1619: % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1620: % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1621: \indexnofonts
1622: \makevalueexpandable
1623: \turnoffactive
1624: \iftxiuseunicodedestname
1625: % Pass through Unicode characters.
1626: \else
1627: % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
1628: \passthroughcharsfalse
1629: \fi
1630: \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1631: \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1632: }}
1633: %
1634: \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
1635: \turnoffactive
1636: % Always use Unicode characters in title texts.
1637: \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1638: % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16.
1639: % So we do not convert.
1640: \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
1641: }}
1642: %
1643: \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
1644: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
1645: \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1646: }
1647: %
1648: % by default, use black for everything.
1649: \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
1650: \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
1651: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1652: %
1653: \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1654: \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
1655: \setpdfdestname{#3}
1656: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
1657: \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
1658: \fi
1659: %
1660: \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A
1661: << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }%
1662: }
1663: %
1664: \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1665: \begingroup
1666: %
1667: % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary.
1668: % Therefore, we read toc only once.
1669: %
1670: % We use node names as destinations.
1671: %
1672: % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number
1673: % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much
1674: % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer.
1675: \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1676: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1677: \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
1678: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1679: \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}%
1680: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1681: \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}%
1682: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1683: \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}%
1684: %
1685: \let\appentry\numchapentry%
1686: \let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
1687: \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
1688: \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
1689: \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1690: \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
1691: \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
1692: \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
1693: \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
1694: %
1695: % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
1696: % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
1697: %
1698: \indexnofonts
1699: \setupdatafile
1700: % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1701: % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1702: \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1703: \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1704: \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1705: \input \tocreadfilename
1706: \endgroup
1707: }
1708: {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
1709: \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
1710: \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1711: \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1712: ]
1713:
1714: \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> }
1715: % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary
1716: % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it.
1717: % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315,
1718: % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings.
1719: % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
1720: %
1721: \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1722: \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1723: \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1724: \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1725: \advance\filenamelength by 1
1726: \fi
1727: \nextsp}
1728: \def\getfilename#1{%
1729: \filenamelength=0
1730: % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1731: % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1732: \edef\temp{#1}%
1733: \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
1734: }
1735: % make a live url in pdf output.
1736: \def\pdfurl#1{%
1737: \begingroup
1738: % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1739: % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1740: % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1741: % people have actually reported a problem with.
1742: %
1743: \normalturnoffactive
1744: \def\@{@}%
1745: \let\/=\empty
1746: \makevalueexpandable
1747: % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1748: % special-casing \var here?
1749: \def\var##1{##1}%
1750: %
1751: \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1752: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
1753: /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}%
1754: \endgroup}
1755: \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}}
1756: \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1757: \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1758: \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1759: \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1760: \def\maketoks{%
1761: \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1762: \ifx\first0\adn0
1763: \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1764: \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1765: \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1766: \else
1767: \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1768: \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1769: \let\next=\maketoks
1770: \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1771: \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1772: \fi
1773: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1774: \next}
1775: \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1776: {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1777: \def\pdflink#1{\pdflinkpage{#1}{#1}}%
1778: \def\pdflinkpage#1#2{%
1779: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
1780: /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}%
1781: \setcolor{\linkcolor}#2\endlink}
1782: \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1783: %
1784: %
1785: % @image support
1786: %
1787: % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1788: \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
1789: \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1790: \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1791: %
1792: % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1793: % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1794: % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1795: % bitmap.
1796: \let\xeteximgext=\empty
1797: \begingroup
1798: \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1799: \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1800: \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1801: \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1802: \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1803: \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1804: \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
1805: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
1806: \fi
1807: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
1808: \fi
1809: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
1810: \fi
1811: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
1812: \fi
1813: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}%
1814: \fi
1815: \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}%
1816: \fi
1817: \closein 1
1818: \endgroup
1819: %
1820: % Putting an \hbox around the image can prevent an over-long line
1821: % after the image.
1822: \hbox\bgroup
1823: \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}%
1824: \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
1825: \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
1826: \else
1827: \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}%
1828: \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
1829: \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
1830: \else
1831: \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
1832: \fi
1833: \fi
1834: \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
1835: \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
1836: \egroup
1837: }
1838: \fi
1839:
1840:
1841: %
1842: \message{fonts,}
1843:
1844: % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1845: % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1846: % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1847: %
1848: \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1849: \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1850: \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1851: %
1852: % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1853: \def\baselinefactor{1}
1854: %
1855: \newdimen\textleading
1856: \def\setleading#1{%
1857: \dimen0 = #1\relax
1858: \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
1859: \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1860: \normalbaselines
1861: \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1862: \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1863: depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1864: }%
1865: }
1866:
1867: % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1868: %
1869: % do nothing with this by default.
1870: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
1871: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
1872: \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
1873:
1874: % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1875: % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1876: % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1877: \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
1878: \begingroup
1879: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1880: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1881: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1882: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1883: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1884: %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1885: %%Version: 1.000
1886: %%EndComments
1887: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1888: 12 dict begin
1889: begincmap
1890: /CIDSystemInfo
1891: << /Registry (TeX)
1892: /Ordering (OT1)
1893: /Supplement 0
1894: >> def
1895: /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
1896: /CMapType 2 def
1897: 1 begincodespacerange
1898: <00> <7F>
1899: endcodespacerange
1900: 8 beginbfrange
1901: <00> <01> <0393>
1902: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1903: <23> <26> <0023>
1904: <28> <3B> <0028>
1905: <3F> <5B> <003F>
1906: <5D> <5E> <005D>
1907: <61> <7A> <0061>
1908: <7B> <7C> <2013>
1909: endbfrange
1910: 40 beginbfchar
1911: <02> <0398>
1912: <03> <039B>
1913: <04> <039E>
1914: <05> <03A0>
1915: <06> <03A3>
1916: <07> <03D2>
1917: <08> <03A6>
1918: <0B> <00660066>
1919: <0C> <00660069>
1920: <0D> <0066006C>
1921: <0E> <006600660069>
1922: <0F> <00660066006C>
1923: <10> <0131>
1924: <11> <0237>
1925: <12> <0060>
1926: <13> <00B4>
1927: <14> <02C7>
1928: <15> <02D8>
1929: <16> <00AF>
1930: <17> <02DA>
1931: <18> <00B8>
1932: <19> <00DF>
1933: <1A> <00E6>
1934: <1B> <0153>
1935: <1C> <00F8>
1936: <1D> <00C6>
1937: <1E> <0152>
1938: <1F> <00D8>
1939: <21> <0021>
1940: <22> <201D>
1941: <27> <2019>
1942: <3C> <00A1>
1943: <3D> <003D>
1944: <3E> <00BF>
1945: <5C> <201C>
1946: <5F> <02D9>
1947: <60> <2018>
1948: <7D> <02DD>
1949: <7E> <007E>
1950: <7F> <00A8>
1951: endbfchar
1952: endcmap
1953: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1954: end
1955: end
1956: %%EndResource
1957: %%EOF
1958: }\endgroup
1959: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
1960: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1961: }%
1962: %
1963: % \cmapOT1IT
1964: \begingroup
1965: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1966: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1967: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1968: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1969: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1970: %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1971: %%Version: 1.000
1972: %%EndComments
1973: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1974: 12 dict begin
1975: begincmap
1976: /CIDSystemInfo
1977: << /Registry (TeX)
1978: /Ordering (OT1IT)
1979: /Supplement 0
1980: >> def
1981: /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
1982: /CMapType 2 def
1983: 1 begincodespacerange
1984: <00> <7F>
1985: endcodespacerange
1986: 8 beginbfrange
1987: <00> <01> <0393>
1988: <09> <0A> <03A8>
1989: <25> <26> <0025>
1990: <28> <3B> <0028>
1991: <3F> <5B> <003F>
1992: <5D> <5E> <005D>
1993: <61> <7A> <0061>
1994: <7B> <7C> <2013>
1995: endbfrange
1996: 42 beginbfchar
1997: <02> <0398>
1998: <03> <039B>
1999: <04> <039E>
2000: <05> <03A0>
2001: <06> <03A3>
2002: <07> <03D2>
2003: <08> <03A6>
2004: <0B> <00660066>
2005: <0C> <00660069>
2006: <0D> <0066006C>
2007: <0E> <006600660069>
2008: <0F> <00660066006C>
2009: <10> <0131>
2010: <11> <0237>
2011: <12> <0060>
2012: <13> <00B4>
2013: <14> <02C7>
2014: <15> <02D8>
2015: <16> <00AF>
2016: <17> <02DA>
2017: <18> <00B8>
2018: <19> <00DF>
2019: <1A> <00E6>
2020: <1B> <0153>
2021: <1C> <00F8>
2022: <1D> <00C6>
2023: <1E> <0152>
2024: <1F> <00D8>
2025: <21> <0021>
2026: <22> <201D>
2027: <23> <0023>
2028: <24> <00A3>
2029: <27> <2019>
2030: <3C> <00A1>
2031: <3D> <003D>
2032: <3E> <00BF>
2033: <5C> <201C>
2034: <5F> <02D9>
2035: <60> <2018>
2036: <7D> <02DD>
2037: <7E> <007E>
2038: <7F> <00A8>
2039: endbfchar
2040: endcmap
2041: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
2042: end
2043: end
2044: %%EndResource
2045: %%EOF
2046: }\endgroup
2047: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
2048: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
2049: }%
2050: %
2051: % \cmapOT1TT
2052: \begingroup
2053: \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
2054: \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
2055: %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
2056: %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
2057: %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
2058: %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
2059: %%Version: 1.000
2060: %%EndComments
2061: /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
2062: 12 dict begin
2063: begincmap
2064: /CIDSystemInfo
2065: << /Registry (TeX)
2066: /Ordering (OT1TT)
2067: /Supplement 0
2068: >> def
2069: /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
2070: /CMapType 2 def
2071: 1 begincodespacerange
2072: <00> <7F>
2073: endcodespacerange
2074: 5 beginbfrange
2075: <00> <01> <0393>
2076: <09> <0A> <03A8>
2077: <21> <26> <0021>
2078: <28> <5F> <0028>
2079: <61> <7E> <0061>
2080: endbfrange
2081: 32 beginbfchar
2082: <02> <0398>
2083: <03> <039B>
2084: <04> <039E>
2085: <05> <03A0>
2086: <06> <03A3>
2087: <07> <03D2>
2088: <08> <03A6>
2089: <0B> <2191>
2090: <0C> <2193>
2091: <0D> <0027>
2092: <0E> <00A1>
2093: <0F> <00BF>
2094: <10> <0131>
2095: <11> <0237>
2096: <12> <0060>
2097: <13> <00B4>
2098: <14> <02C7>
2099: <15> <02D8>
2100: <16> <00AF>
2101: <17> <02DA>
2102: <18> <00B8>
2103: <19> <00DF>
2104: <1A> <00E6>
2105: <1B> <0153>
2106: <1C> <00F8>
2107: <1D> <00C6>
2108: <1E> <0152>
2109: <1F> <00D8>
2110: <20> <2423>
2111: <27> <2019>
2112: <60> <2018>
2113: <7F> <00A8>
2114: endbfchar
2115: endcmap
2116: CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
2117: end
2118: end
2119: %%EndResource
2120: %%EOF
2121: }\endgroup
2122: \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
2123: \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
2124: }%
2125: \fi\fi
2126: %
2127: % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
2128: \let\cmap\gobble
2129: %
2130: % (end of cmaps)
2131:
2132:
2133: % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
2134: % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
2135: % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
2136: % Example:
2137: % #1 = \textrm
2138: % #2 = \rmshape
2139: % #3 = 10
2140: % #4 = \mainmagstep
2141: % #5 = OT1
2142: %
2143: \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
2144: \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
2145: \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
2146: \ifx#2\ttshape\hyphenchar#1=-1 \fi
2147: \ifx#2\ttbshape\hyphenchar#1=-1 \fi
2148: \ifx#2\ttslshape\hyphenchar#1=-1 \fi
2149: }
2150:
2151: % Use cm as the default font prefix.
2152: % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
2153: % before you read in texinfo.tex.
2154: \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
2155: \def\fontprefix{cm}
2156: \fi
2157: % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
2158: \def\rmshape{r}
2159: \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold
2160: \def\bfshape{b}
2161: \def\bxshape{bx}
2162: \def\ttshape{tt}
2163: \def\ttbshape{tt}
2164: \def\ttslshape{sltt}
2165: \def\itshape{ti}
2166: \def\itbshape{bxti}
2167: \def\slshape{sl}
2168: \def\slbshape{bxsl}
2169: \def\sfshape{ss}
2170: \def\sfbshape{ss}
2171: \def\scshape{csc}
2172: \def\scbshape{csc}
2173:
2174: % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
2175: %
2176: \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
2177: % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
2178: \def\textnominalsize{11pt}
2179: \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
2180: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2181: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2182: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2183: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
2184: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2185: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2186: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2187: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2188: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
2189: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
2190: \def\textecsize{1095}
2191:
2192: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
2193: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2194: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2195: \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2196: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2197: \def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
2198: \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf}
2199:
2200: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
2201: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
2202: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2203: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2204: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2205: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2206: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2207: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2208: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2209: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2210: \font\smalli=cmmi9
2211: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
2212: \def\smallecsize{0900}
2213:
2214: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
2215: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
2216: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2217: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
2218: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2219: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
2220: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2221: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2222: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2223: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
2224: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
2225: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
2226: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
2227:
2228: % Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
2229: \def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
2230: \setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
2231: \setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
2232: \setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2233: \setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
2234: \setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2235: \setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2236: \setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2237: \setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
2238: \font\seveni=cmmi7
2239: \font\sevensy=cmsy7
2240: \def\sevenecsize{0700}
2241:
2242: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2243: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
2244: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2245: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
2246: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2247: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
2248: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
2249: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2250: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
2251: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2252: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
2253: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
2254: \def\titleecsize{2074}
2255:
2256: % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
2257: \def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
2258: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2259: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
2260: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2261: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2262: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
2263: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
2264: \let\chapbf=\chaprm
2265: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2266: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
2267: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
2268: \def\chapecsize{1728}
2269:
2270: % Section fonts (14.4pt).
2271: \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
2272: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2273: \setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2274: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2275: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2276: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2277: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2278: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2279: \let\secbf\secrm
2280: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2281: \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2282: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2283: \def\sececsize{1440}
2284:
2285: % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
2286: \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
2287: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2288: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
2289: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
2290: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
2291: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
2292: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2293: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2294: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
2295: \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
2296: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
2297: \def\ssececsize{1200}
2298:
2299: % Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt).
2300: \def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
2301: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2302: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2303: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2304: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2305: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2306: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2307: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2308: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2309: \font\reducedi=cmmi10
2310: \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
2311: \def\reducedecsize{1000}
2312:
2313: \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
2314: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2315: \rm
2316: } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
2317:
2318:
2319: % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
2320: % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
2321: % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
2322: % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
2323: %
2324: \def\definetextfontsizex{%
2325: % Text fonts (10pt).
2326: \def\textnominalsize{10pt}
2327: \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
2328: \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2329: \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2330: \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2331: \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
2332: \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2333: \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2334: \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
2335: \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
2336: \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
2337: \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
2338: \def\textecsize{1000}
2339:
2340: % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
2341: \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2342: \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
2343: \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
2344: \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
2345: \def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
2346: \let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf}
2347:
2348: % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
2349: \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
2350: \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2351: \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2352: \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2353: \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2354: \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2355: \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2356: \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2357: \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2358: \font\smalli=cmmi9
2359: \font\smallsy=cmsy9
2360: \def\smallecsize{0900}
2361:
2362: % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
2363: \def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
2364: \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2365: \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
2366: \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2367: \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
2368: \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2369: \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2370: \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
2371: \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
2372: \font\smalleri=cmmi8
2373: \font\smallersy=cmsy8
2374: \def\smallerecsize{0800}
2375:
2376: % Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
2377: \def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
2378: \setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
2379: \setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
2380: \setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2381: \setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
2382: \setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2383: \setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2384: \setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
2385: \setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
2386: \font\seveni=cmmi7
2387: \font\sevensy=cmsy7
2388: \def\sevenecsize{0700}
2389:
2390: % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2391: \def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
2392: \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
2393: \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
2394: \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2395: \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
2396: \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
2397: \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2398: \let\titlebf=\titlerm
2399: \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
2400: \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
2401: \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
2402: \def\titleecsize{2074}
2403:
2404: % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
2405: \def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
2406: \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2407: \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2408: \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2409: \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2410: \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2411: \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2412: \let\chapbf\chaprm
2413: \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2414: \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2415: \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2416: \def\chapecsize{1440}
2417:
2418: % Section fonts (12pt).
2419: \def\secnominalsize{12pt}
2420: \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2421: \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
2422: \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2423: \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2424: \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2425: \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2426: \let\secbf\secrm
2427: \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2428: \font\seci=cmmi12
2429: \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
2430: \def\sececsize{1200}
2431:
2432: % Subsection fonts (10pt).
2433: \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
2434: \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2435: \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2436: \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2437: \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2438: \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2439: \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2440: \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2441: \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2442: \font\sseci=cmmi10
2443: \font\ssecsy=cmsy10
2444: \def\ssececsize{1000}
2445:
2446: % Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt).
2447: \def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
2448: \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2449: \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2450: \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2451: \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2452: \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2453: \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2454: \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2455: \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2456: \font\reducedi=cmmi9
2457: \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2458: \def\reducedecsize{0900}
2459:
2460: \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs
2461: \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM
2462: \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2463: \rm
2464: } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
2465:
2466: % Fonts for short table of contents.
2467: \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2468: \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
2469: \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2470: \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2471:
2472:
2473: % We provide the user-level command
2474: % @fonttextsize 10
2475: % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
2476: %
2477: \def\xiword{11}
2478: \def\xword{10}
2479: \def\xwordpt{10pt}
2480: %
2481: \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2482: \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2483: %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2484: %
2485: % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2486: % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2487: %
2488: \begingroup \globaldefs=1
2489: \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2490: \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2491: \else
2492: \errhelp=\EMsimple
2493: \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
2494: \fi\fi
2495: \endgroup
2496: }
2497:
2498: %
2499: % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
2500: % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
2501: % italics, not bold italics.
2502: %
2503: \def\setfontstyle#1{%
2504: \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
2505: \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font
2506: }
2507:
2508: \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
2509: \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
2510: \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
2511: \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
2512: \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
2513:
2514: % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
2515: % So we set up a \sf.
2516: \newfam\sffam
2517: \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
2518:
2519: % We don't need math for this font style.
2520: \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
2521:
2522:
2523: % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2524: % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.
2525: % We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
2526: %
2527: \def\resetmathfonts{%
2528: \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont
2529: \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont
2530: \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont
2531: %
2532: % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless
2533: % of the current font size.
2534: \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy
2535: \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl
2536: \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt
2537: \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf
2538: }
2539:
2540:
2541:
2542: % \defineassignfonts{SIZE} -
2543: % Define sequence \assignfontsSIZE, which switches between font sizes
2544: % by redefining the meanings of \STYLEfont. (Just \STYLE additionally sets
2545: % the current \fam for math mode.)
2546: %
2547: \def\defineassignfonts#1{%
2548: \expandafter\edef\csname assignfonts#1\endcsname{%
2549: \let\noexpand\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname
2550: \let\noexpand\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname
2551: \let\noexpand\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname
2552: \let\noexpand\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname
2553: \let\noexpand\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname
2554: \let\noexpand\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname
2555: \let\noexpand\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname
2556: \let\noexpand\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname
2557: \let\noexpand\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname
2558: \let\noexpand\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname
2559: }
2560: }
2561:
2562: \def\assignfonts#1{%
2563: \csname assignfonts#1\endcsname
2564: }
2565:
2566: \newif\ifrmisbold
2567:
2568: % Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size
2569: % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for
2570: % normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size.
2571: \def\switchtolllsize{%
2572: \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}%
2573: \ifrmisbold
2574: \let\rmfont\bffont
2575: \fi
2576: \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
2577: }%
2578:
2579: \def\switchtolsize{%
2580: \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}%
2581: \ifrmisbold
2582: \let\rmfont\bffont
2583: \fi
2584: \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
2585: }%
2586:
2587: % Define the font-changing commands (all called \...fonts).
2588: % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2589: % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
2590: % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2591: %
2592: % Note: The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for
2593: % italics in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only.
2594: %
2595: \def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{%
2596: \defineassignfonts{#1}%
2597: \expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{%
2598: \def\curfontsize{#1}%
2599: \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}%
2600: \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname
2601: \csname assignfonts#1\endcsname
2602: \resetmathfonts
2603: \setleading{#4}%
2604: }}
2605:
2606: \definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false}
2607: \definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true}
2608: \definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true}
2609: \definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true}
2610: \definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true}
2611: \definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
2612: \definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
2613: \definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false}
2614:
2615: \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
2616: \let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts
2617: \let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts
2618:
2619: % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2620: \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
2621: \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
2622:
2623: % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2624: \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
2625:
2626: % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2627: % can fit this many characters:
2628: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
2629: % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2630: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
2631: % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2632: % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
2633: %
2634: % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2635: % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
2636: % --karl, 24jan03.
2637:
2638: % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2639: %
2640: \definetextfontsizexi
2641:
2642:
2643: % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
2644: % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2645: % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2646: % this property, we can check that font parameter. #1 is what to
2647: % print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print otherwise.
2648: \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
2649:
2650: % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
2651: % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
2652: % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
2653: % this is not a problem.
2654: \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
2655:
2656:
2657: % Check if internal flag is clear, i.e. has not been @set.
2658: \def\ifflagclear#1#2#3{%
2659: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2660: #2\else#3\fi
2661: }
2662:
2663: {
2664: \catcode`\'=\active
2665: \catcode`\`=\active
2666:
2667: \gdef\setcodequotes{\let`\codequoteleft \let'\codequoteright}
2668: \gdef\setregularquotes{\let`\lq \let'\rq}
2669: }
2670: \setregularquotes
2671:
2672: % output for ' in @code
2673: % in tt font hex 0D (undirected) or 27 (curly right quote)
2674: %
2675: \def\codequoteright{%
2676: \ifusingtt
2677: {\ifflagclear{txicodequoteundirected}%
2678: {\ifflagclear{codequoteundirected}%
2679: {'}%
2680: {\char"0D }}%
2681: {\char"0D }}%
2682: {'}%
2683: }
2684:
2685: % output for ` in @code
2686: % in tt font hex 12 (grave accent) or 60 (curly left quote)
2687: % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2688: %
2689: \def\codequoteleft{%
2690: \ifusingtt
2691: {\ifflagclear{txicodequotebacktick}%
2692: {\ifflagclear{codequotebacktick}%
2693: {\relax`}%
2694: {\char"12 }}%
2695: {\char"12 }}%
2696: {\relax`}%
2697: }
2698:
2699: % Commands to set the quote options.
2700: %
2701: \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
2702: \def\temp{#1}%
2703: \ifx\temp\onword
2704: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2705: = t%
2706: \else\ifx\temp\offword
2707: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2708: = \relax
2709: \else
2710: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2711: \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2712: \fi\fi
2713: }
2714:
2715: \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
2716: \def\temp{#1}%
2717: \ifx\temp\onword
2718: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2719: = t%
2720: \else\ifx\temp\offword
2721: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2722: = \relax
2723: \else
2724: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2725: \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2726: \fi\fi
2727: }
2728:
2729: % Turn them on by default
2730: \let\SETtxicodequoteundirected = t
2731: \let\SETtxicodequotebacktick = t
2732:
2733:
2734: % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2735: \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2736:
2737: % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2738: \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
2739:
2740: % Font commands.
2741:
2742: % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
2743: % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
2744: % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
2745: \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
2746: \ifusingtt
2747: {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
2748: {\def\next{{#1#2}\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2749: \next
2750: }
2751: \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
2752: \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
2753:
2754: % Output an italic correction unless the following character is such as
2755: % not to need one.
2756: \def\smartitaliccorrection{\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrectionx}
2757: \def\smartitaliccorrectionx{%
2758: \ifx\next,%
2759: \else\ifx\next-%
2760: \else\ifx\next.%
2761: \else\ifx\next\.%
2762: \else\ifx\next\comma%
2763: \else\ptexslash
2764: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
2765: \aftersmartic
2766: }
2767:
2768: % @cite unconditionally uses \sl with \smartitaliccorrection.
2769: \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\smartitaliccorrection}
2770:
2771: % @var unconditionally uses \sl. This gives consistency for
2772: % parameter names whether they are in @def, @table @code or a
2773: % regular paragraph.
2774: % To get ttsl font for @var when used in code context, @set txicodevaristt.
2775: % The \null is to reset \spacefactor.
2776: \def\aftersmartic{}
2777: \def\var#1{%
2778: \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
2779: \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
2780: %
2781: \ifflagclear{txicodevaristt}%
2782: {\def\varnext{{{\sl #1}}\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2783: {\def\varnext{\smartslanted{#1}}}%
2784: \varnext
2785: }
2786:
2787: % To be removed after next release
2788: \def\SETtxicodevaristt{}% @set txicodevaristt
2789:
2790: \let\i=\smartitalic
2791: \let\slanted=\smartslanted
2792: \let\dfn=\smartslanted
2793: \let\emph=\smartitalic
2794:
2795: % @r for roman font, used for code comment
2796: \def\r#1{{%
2797: \usenormaldash % get --, --- ligatures even if in @code
2798: \defcharsdefault % in case on def line
2799: \rm #1}}
2800: {\catcode`-=\active \gdef\usenormaldash{\let-\normaldash}}
2801:
2802: % @sc, undocumented @ii.
2803: \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
2804: \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2805:
2806: % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
2807: \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
2808: \let\strong=\b
2809:
2810: % @sansserif, explicit sans.
2811: \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2812:
2813: \newif\iffrenchspacing
2814: \frenchspacingfalse
2815:
2816: % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2817: % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2818: % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2819: %
2820: \catcode`@=11
2821: \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2822: \iffrenchspacing\else
2823: \frenchspacingtrue
2824: \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
2825: \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
2826: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2827: \fi
2828: }
2829: \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2830: \iffrenchspacing
2831: \frenchspacingfalse
2832: \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2833: \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2834: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2835: \fi
2836: }
2837: \catcode`@=\other
2838: \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2839:
2840: % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
2841: %
2842: \def\onword{on}
2843: \def\offword{off}
2844: %
2845: \let\frenchspacingsetting\plainnonfrenchspacing % used in output routine
2846: \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
2847: \def\temp{#1}%
2848: \ifx\temp\onword \let\frenchspacingsetting\plainfrenchspacing
2849: \else\ifx\temp\offword \let\frenchspacingsetting\plainnonfrenchspacing
2850: \else
2851: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2852: \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
2853: \fi\fi
2854: \frenchspacingsetting
2855: }
2856:
2857:
2858: % @t, explicit typewriter.
2859: \def\t#1{%
2860: {\tt \defcharsdefault \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2861: \null
2862: }
2863:
2864: % @samp.
2865: \def\samp#1{{\setcodequotes\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2866:
2867: % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
2868: \let\indicateurl=\samp
2869:
2870: % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
2871: % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
2872: % This is a subroutine for that.
2873: \def\tclose#1{%
2874: {%
2875: % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2876: \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2877: %
2878: % Switch to typewriter.
2879: \tt
2880: %
2881: % `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2882: \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2883: %
2884: \plainfrenchspacing
2885: #1%
2886: }%
2887: \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
2888: }
2889:
2890: % This is for LuaTeX: It is not sufficient to disable hyphenation at
2891: % explicit dashes by setting `\hyphenchar` to -1.
2892: \def\dashnobreak{%
2893: \normaldash
2894: \penalty 10000 }
2895:
2896: % We must turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2897: % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2898: % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2899: % We explicitly allow hyphenation at these characters
2900: % using \discretionary.
2901: %
2902: % Hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words was turned off
2903: % by default for the tt fonts using the \hyphenchar parameter of TeX.
2904: {
2905: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2906: \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2907: \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
2908: %
2909: \global\def\code{\begingroup
2910: \setcodequotes
2911: \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
2912: \ifallowcodebreaks
2913: \let-\codedash
2914: \let_\codeunder
2915: \else
2916: \let-\dashnobreak
2917: \let_\realunder
2918: \fi
2919: \codex
2920: }
2921: %
2922: \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
2923: \gdef\codedashfinish{%
2924: \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
2925: %
2926: % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
2927: % (a) the next character is a -, or
2928: % (b) the preceding character is a -, or
2929: % (c) we are at the start of the string.
2930: % In both cases (b) and (c), \codedashnobreak should be set to \codedash.
2931: %
2932: % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
2933: % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
2934: \ifx\next\codedash \else
2935: \ifx\codedashnobreak\codedash
2936: \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
2937: \fi
2938: % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
2939: % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
2940: \global\let\codedashnobreak= \next
2941: }
2942: }
2943: \def\normaldash{-}
2944: %
2945: \def\codex #1{\tclose{%
2946: % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
2947: % after the -. \codedashnobreak is set to the first character in
2948: % @code.
2949: \futurelet\codedashnobreak\relax
2950: #1%
2951: }\endgroup}
2952:
2953: \def\codeunder{%
2954: % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
2955: % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2956: % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2957: % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2958: \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
2959: \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2960: \else\normalunderscore \fi
2961: \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2962: {\_}%
2963: }
2964:
2965: % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2966: % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
2967: % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
2968: % and _ on and off.
2969: %
2970: \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
2971:
2972: \def\keywordtrue{true}
2973: \def\keywordfalse{false}
2974:
2975: \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2976: \def\txiarg{#1}%
2977: \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2978: \allowcodebreakstrue
2979: \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2980: \allowcodebreaksfalse
2981: \else
2982: \errhelp = \EMsimple
2983: \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
2984: \fi\fi
2985: }
2986:
2987: % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
2988: % so use \code rather than \samp.
2989: \let\command=\code
2990: \let\env=\code
2991: \let\file=\code
2992: \let\option=\code
2993:
2994: % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
2995: % (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
2996: % an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
2997: % addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
2998:
2999: % TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
3000: % arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
3001: \newif\ifurefurlonlylink
3002:
3003: % The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in
3004: % \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to
3005: % a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not
3006: % conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere.
3007: \def\nopretolerance{%
3008: \pretolerance=-1
3009: \def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}%
3010: }
3011:
3012: % The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
3013: % places within the url.
3014: \def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
3015: \let\uref=\urefbreak
3016: %
3017: \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
3018: \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
3019: \unsepspaces
3020: \pdfurl{#1}%
3021: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
3022: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
3023: \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
3024: \else
3025: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
3026: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
3027: \ifpdf
3028: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
3029: \ifurefurlonlylink
3030: % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
3031: \unhbox0
3032: \else
3033: % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
3034: % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
3035: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
3036: \fi
3037: \else
3038: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
3039: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
3040: \else
3041: % For XeTeX
3042: \ifurefurlonlylink
3043: % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
3044: \unhbox0
3045: \else
3046: % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
3047: % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
3048: \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
3049: \fi
3050: \fi
3051: \fi
3052: \else
3053: \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
3054: \fi
3055: \fi
3056: \endlink
3057: \endgroup}
3058:
3059: % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
3060: \def\urefcatcodes{%
3061: \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
3062: \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
3063: \catcode`\/=\active
3064: }
3065: {
3066: \urefcatcodes
3067: %
3068: \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
3069: \setcodequotes
3070: \urefcatcodes
3071: \let&\urefcodeamp
3072: \let.\urefcodedot
3073: \let#\urefcodehash
3074: \let?\urefcodequest
3075: \let/\urefcodeslash
3076: \codex
3077: }
3078: %
3079: % By default, they are just regular characters.
3080: \global\def&{\normalamp}
3081: \global\def.{\normaldot}
3082: \global\def#{\normalhash}
3083: \global\def?{\normalquest}
3084: \global\def/{\normalslash}
3085: }
3086:
3087: \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak}
3088: \def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak}
3089: \def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak}
3090: \def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak}
3091: \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
3092: {
3093: \catcode`\/=\active
3094: \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
3095: \urefprebreak \slashChar
3096: % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
3097: % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
3098: \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi
3099: }
3100: }
3101:
3102: % By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to
3103: % break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at
3104: % all, for manual control.
3105: %
3106: \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
3107: \def\txiarg{#1}%
3108: \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
3109: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
3110: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
3111: \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
3112: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
3113: \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak}
3114: \else
3115: \errhelp = \EMsimple
3116: \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
3117: \fi\fi\fi
3118: }
3119: \def\wordafter{after}
3120: \def\wordbefore{before}
3121: \def\wordnone{none}
3122:
3123: % Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can
3124: % be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in
3125: % the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added
3126: % at the end of the line, or no break at all here.
3127: % Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how
3128: % preferable one choice is over the other.
3129: \def\urefallowbreak{%
3130: \penalty0\relax
3131: \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax
3132: \penalty1000\relax
3133: \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax
3134: }
3135:
3136: \urefbreakstyle after
3137:
3138: % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
3139: %
3140: \let\url=\uref
3141:
3142: % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
3143: % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
3144: %
3145: %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
3146: \ifpdforxetex
3147: \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
3148: \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
3149: \unsepspaces
3150: \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
3151: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
3152: \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
3153: \endlink
3154: \endgroup}
3155: \else
3156: \let\email=\uref
3157: \fi
3158:
3159: % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
3160: % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
3161: % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
3162: \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
3163: \def\txiarg{#1}%
3164: \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
3165: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
3166: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
3167: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
3168: \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
3169: \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
3170: \else
3171: \errhelp = \EMsimple
3172: \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
3173: \fi\fi\fi
3174: }
3175: \def\worddistinct{distinct}
3176: \def\wordexample{example}
3177: \def\wordcode{code}
3178:
3179: % Default is `distinct'.
3180: \kbdinputstyle distinct
3181:
3182: \def\kbd#1{%
3183: \tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes#1}%
3184: }
3185:
3186: % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
3187: %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
3188: %\font\keysy=cmsy9
3189: %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
3190: % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
3191: % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
3192: % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
3193: % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
3194: % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
3195:
3196: % definition of @key with no lozenge.
3197: %
3198: \def\key#1{{\setregularquotes \tt #1}\null}
3199:
3200: % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
3201: \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
3202:
3203: % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
3204: \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
3205: \def\click{\arrow}
3206:
3207: % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
3208: % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
3209: %
3210: \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
3211:
3212: % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
3213: % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
3214: % all-uppercase.
3215: %
3216: \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
3217: \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
3218: {\switchtolsize #1}%
3219: \def\temp{#2}%
3220: \ifx\temp\empty \else
3221: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
3222: \fi
3223: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
3224: }
3225:
3226: % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
3227: % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
3228: %
3229: \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
3230: \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
3231: {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
3232: \def\temp{#2}%
3233: \ifx\temp\empty \else
3234: \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
3235: \fi
3236: \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
3237: }
3238:
3239: % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
3240: %
3241: \def\asis#1{#1}
3242:
3243: % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
3244: %
3245: % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
3246: % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
3247: % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
3248: % which is what @var uses.
3249: {
3250: \catcode`\_ = \active
3251: \gdef\mathunderscore{%
3252: \catcode`\_=\active
3253: \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
3254: }
3255: }
3256: % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
3257: % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
3258: % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
3259: %
3260: % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
3261: \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
3262: %
3263: \def\math{%
3264: \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
3265: \tex
3266: \mathunderscore
3267: \let\\ = \mathbackslash
3268: \mathactive
3269: % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
3270: \let\"=\ddot
3271: \let\'=\acute
3272: \let\==\bar
3273: \let\^=\hat
3274: \let\`=\grave
3275: \let\u=\breve
3276: \let\v=\check
3277: \let\~=\tilde
3278: \let\dotaccent=\dot
3279: % have to provide another name for sup operator
3280: \let\mathopsup=\sup
3281: $\expandafter\finishmath\fi
3282: }
3283: \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
3284:
3285: % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
3286: % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
3287: % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
3288: %
3289: {
3290: \catcode`^ = \active
3291: \catcode`< = \active
3292: \catcode`> = \active
3293: \catcode`+ = \active
3294: \catcode`' = \active
3295: \gdef\mathactive{%
3296: \let^ = \ptexhat
3297: \let< = \ptexless
3298: \let> = \ptexgtr
3299: \let+ = \ptexplus
3300: \let' = \ptexquoteright
3301: }
3302: }
3303:
3304: % for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
3305: % If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
3306: % into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
3307: % one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
3308: % fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
3309: %
3310: \def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
3311: \def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
3312: %
3313: \def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
3314: \def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
3315:
3316: % provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common
3317: \def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}}
3318:
3319: % @displaymath.
3320: % \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and
3321: % \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex.
3322: {\obeylines
3323: \globaldefs=1
3324: \envdef\displaymath{%
3325: \tex%
3326: \def\thisenv{\displaymath}%
3327: \begingroup\let\end\displaymathend%
3328: $$%
3329: }
3330:
3331: \def\displaymathend{$$\endgroup\end}%
3332:
3333: \def\Edisplaymath{%
3334: \def\thisenv{\tex}%
3335: \end tex
3336: }}
3337:
3338:
3339: % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
3340: % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
3341: % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
3342: %
3343: \def\outfmtnametex{tex}
3344: %
3345: \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
3346: \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
3347: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
3348: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
3349: }
3350: %
3351: % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
3352: % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
3353: \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
3354: \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
3355: \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
3356: \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
3357: }
3358: %
3359: % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
3360: % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
3361: % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
3362: % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
3363: % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
3364: % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
3365: % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
3366: %
3367: \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
3368: \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
3369: \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
3370: \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
3371: \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
3372: \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
3373: }
3374:
3375: % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
3376: %
3377: \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
3378: \long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
3379: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
3380: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
3381: \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
3382: }
3383:
3384: % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
3385: %
3386: \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
3387: \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
3388: \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
3389: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
3390: }
3391:
3392:
3393: \message{glyphs,}
3394: % and logos.
3395:
3396: % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
3397: \def\@{\char64 }
3398: \let\atchar=\@
3399:
3400: % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
3401: \def\lbracechar{{\ifusingtt{\char123}{\ensuremath\lbrace}}}
3402: \def\rbracechar{{\ifusingtt{\char125}{\ensuremath\rbrace}}}
3403: \let\{=\lbracechar
3404: \let\}=\rbracechar
3405:
3406: % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
3407: \let\comma = ,
3408:
3409: % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
3410: % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
3411: \let\, = \ptexc
3412: \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
3413: \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
3414: \let\tieaccent = \ptext
3415: \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
3416: \let\udotaccent = \d
3417:
3418: % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
3419: % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
3420: \def\questiondown{?`}
3421: \def\exclamdown{!`}
3422: \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}}
3423: \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}}
3424:
3425: % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
3426: \def\imacro{i}
3427: \def\jmacro{j}
3428: \def\dotless#1{%
3429: \def\temp{#1}%
3430: \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
3431: \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
3432: \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
3433: \fi\fi
3434: }
3435:
3436: % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
3437: % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
3438: %
3439: \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
3440:
3441: % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
3442: % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
3443: % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
3444: % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
3445: % \scriptscriptstyle).
3446: %
3447: \def\LaTeX{%
3448: L\kern-.36em
3449: {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
3450: \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
3451: \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
3452: % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
3453: % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
3454: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
3455: \else
3456: \ifx\curfontsize\smallword
3457: % For footnotes and indices
3458: \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
3459: \else
3460: % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
3461: \switchtolllsize A%
3462: \fi
3463: \fi
3464: }%
3465: \vss
3466: }}%
3467: \kern-.15em
3468: \TeX
3469: }
3470: \def\smallword{small}
3471:
3472: % Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
3473: % unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
3474: % but safer, and can't hurt.
3475: \def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
3476: \def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
3477: %
3478: \def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
3479: \def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
3480: \def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
3481: \def\minus{\ensuremath-}
3482:
3483: % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
3484: % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
3485: % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
3486: % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
3487: % whichever is larger.
3488: %
3489: \def\dots{%
3490: \leavevmode
3491: \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
3492: \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
3493: \dimen0 = \wd0
3494: \else
3495: \dimen0 = 1.5em
3496: \fi
3497: \hbox to \dimen0{%
3498: \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
3499: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
3500: .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
3501: .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
3502: }%
3503: }
3504:
3505: % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
3506: %
3507: \def\enddots{%
3508: \dots
3509: \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
3510: }
3511:
3512: % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
3513: %
3514: % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
3515: % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
3516: %
3517: \def\point{$\star$}
3518: \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
3519: \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
3520: \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
3521: \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
3522: \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
3523:
3524: % The @error{} command.
3525: % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
3526: %
3527: \newbox\errorbox
3528: %
3529: {\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
3530: \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
3531: % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
3532: \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
3533: %
3534: \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
3535: \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
3536: \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
3537: \vbox{%
3538: \hrule height\dimen2
3539: \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
3540: \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
3541: \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
3542: \hrule height\dimen2}
3543: \hfil}
3544: %
3545: \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
3546:
3547: % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
3548: %
3549: \def\pounds{{\ifusingtt{\ecfont\char"BF}{\it\$}}}
3550:
3551: % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
3552: % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
3553: % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
3554: % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
3555: % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
3556: %
3557: % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
3558: % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
3559: % font height.
3560: %
3561: % feymr - regular
3562: % feymo - slanted
3563: % feybr - bold
3564: % feybo - bold slanted
3565: %
3566: % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
3567: % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
3568: % Hmm.
3569: %
3570: % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
3571: % Hope not.
3572: %
3573: %
3574: \def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
3575: \def\eurofont{%
3576: % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
3577: % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
3578: % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
3579: % font installed.
3580: %
3581: % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
3582: % that to the current nominal size.
3583: %
3584: % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
3585: % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
3586: %
3587: \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3588: %
3589: \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3590: % bold:
3591: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
3592: \else
3593: % regular:
3594: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
3595: \fi
3596: \thiseurofont
3597: }
3598:
3599: % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
3600: % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
3601: % the redefinition.
3602: %
3603: % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
3604: \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
3605: \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
3606: \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
3607: \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
3608: %
3609: \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
3610: \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
3611: \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
3612: \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
3613: \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
3614: \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
3615: \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
3616: \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
3617: %
3618: \def\L{{\ecfont \char"8A}} % L with stroke
3619: \def\l{{\ecfont \char"AA}} % l with stroke
3620: %
3621: % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
3622: % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
3623: % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
3624: % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
3625: %
3626: % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
3627: % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
3628: % the same EC font.
3629: \def\ogonek#1{{%
3630: \def\temp{#1}%
3631: \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
3632: \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
3633: \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
3634: \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
3635: \else
3636: \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
3637: \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
3638: \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
3639: \fi
3640: \fi\fi\fi\fi
3641: }%
3642: }
3643: \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
3644: \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
3645: \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
3646: \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
3647: %
3648: % Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
3649: % for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
3650: % companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec
3651: % package and follow the same conventions.
3652: %
3653: \def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
3654: \def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
3655: %
3656: \def\etcfont#1{%
3657: % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
3658: % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
3659: % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
3660: % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
3661: \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
3662: \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3663: \ifusingtt
3664: % typewriter:
3665: {\font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize}%
3666: % else
3667: {\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3668: % bold:
3669: \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3670: \else
3671: % regular:
3672: \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3673: \fi}%
3674: \thisecfont
3675: }
3676:
3677: % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
3678: % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
3679: % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
3680: %
3681: \def\registeredsymbol{%
3682: $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}%
3683: \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
3684: }$%
3685: }
3686:
3687: % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
3688: %
3689: \def\textdegree{%
3690: \ifmmode ^\circ
3691: \else {\tcfont \char 176}%
3692: \fi}
3693:
3694: % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
3695: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
3696: % so we'll define it if necessary.
3697: %
3698: \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
3699: \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
3700: \fi
3701:
3702: % Quotes.
3703: \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3704: \chardef\quoteright=`\'
3705:
3706: % only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using
3707: % \ecfont unless necessary.
3708: \def\quotedblleft{%
3709: \ifusingtt{{\ecfont\char"10}}{{\char"5C}}%
3710: }
3711:
3712: \def\quotedblright{%
3713: \ifusingtt{{\ecfont\char"11}}{{\char`\"}}%
3714: }
3715:
3716:
3717: \message{page headings,}
3718:
3719: \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
3720: \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
3721:
3722: % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3723: \newif\ifseenauthor
3724: \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3725:
3726: % @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or
3727: % @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete.
3728: \def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{%
3729: \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
3730: command; move your @contents command if you want the contents
3731: after the title page.}}%
3732: \def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{%
3733: \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
3734: command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you
3735: want the contents after the title page.}}%
3736:
3737: \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
3738: {\headingsoff \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3739: \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}\pageone}
3740:
3741: \envdef\titlepage{%
3742: % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3743: \begingroup
3744: \parindent=0pt \textfonts
3745: \headingsoff
3746: % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3747: \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3748: % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3749: \finishedtitlepagetrue
3750: %
3751: % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3752: % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3753: \let\oldpage = \page
3754: \def\page{%
3755: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3756: \finishtitlepage
3757: \fi
3758: \let\page = \oldpage
3759: \page
3760: \null
3761: }%
3762: }
3763:
3764: \def\Etitlepage{%
3765: \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3766: \finishtitlepage
3767: \fi
3768: % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3769: % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3770: % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3771: % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3772: \oldpage
3773: \pageone
3774: \endgroup
3775: %
3776: }
3777:
3778: \def\finishtitlepage{%
3779: \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
3780: \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3781: \finishedtitlepagetrue
3782: }
3783:
3784: % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
3785: % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
3786: % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should
3787: % be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
3788: %
3789: \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
3790: \rm
3791: \hyphenpenalty=10000
3792: \parindent=0pt
3793: \tolerance=5000
3794: \ptexraggedright
3795: }
3796:
3797: % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3798:
3799: \let\subtitlerm=\rmfont
3800: \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
3801:
3802: \parseargdef\title{%
3803: \checkenv\titlepage
3804: \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
3805: % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3806: \finishedtitlepagefalse
3807: \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
3808: }
3809:
3810: \parseargdef\subtitle{%
3811: \checkenv\titlepage
3812: {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3813: }
3814:
3815: % @author should come last, but may come many times.
3816: % It can also be used inside @quotation.
3817: %
3818: \parseargdef\author{%
3819: \def\temp{\quotation}%
3820: \ifx\thisenv\temp
3821: \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3822: \else
3823: \checkenv\titlepage
3824: \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
3825: {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}%
3826: \fi
3827: }
3828:
3829:
3830: % Set up page headings and footings.
3831:
3832: \let\thispage=\folio
3833:
3834: \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
3835: \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
3836: \newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter
3837: \newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter
3838: \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
3839: \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
3840:
3841: % Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
3842: \headline={{\textfonts\rm\frenchspacingsetting
3843: \ifchapterpage
3844: \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi
3845: \else
3846: \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi
3847: \fi}}
3848:
3849: \footline={{\textfonts\rm\frenchspacingsetting
3850: \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline \else \the\evenfootline \fi}%
3851: \HEADINGShook}
3852: \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
3853:
3854: % Commands to set those variables.
3855: % For example, this is what @headings on does
3856: % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3857: % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3858: % @evenfooting @thisfile||
3859: % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3860:
3861:
3862: \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3863: \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3864: \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3865: \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}
3866: \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline}
3867:
3868: \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3869: \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3870: \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3871: \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3872: \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline}
3873:
3874: \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3875:
3876: \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3877: \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3878: \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3879: \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3880:
3881: \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3882: \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3883: \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3884: \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3885: %
3886: % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
3887: % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3888: \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt
3889: \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
3890: }
3891:
3892: \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3893:
3894: % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3895: % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3896: %
3897: % The same set of arguments for:
3898: %
3899: % @oddheadingmarks
3900: % @evenfootingmarks
3901: % @oddfootingmarks
3902: % @everyheadingmarks
3903: % @everyfootingmarks
3904:
3905: % These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
3906: % \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
3907: % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
3908: %
3909: \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
3910: \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
3911: \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
3912: \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
3913: \parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
3914: \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
3915: \parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
3916: \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
3917: % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3918: \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3919: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
3920: \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
3921: }
3922:
3923: \everyheadingmarks bottom
3924: \everyfootingmarks bottom
3925:
3926: % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3927: % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3928: % @headings off turns them off.
3929: % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3930: % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3931: % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3932: % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3933: % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3934: % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3935:
3936: \parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
3937:
3938: \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
3939: \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}%
3940: \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}%
3941: }
3942:
3943: \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
3944:
3945: % Set the page number to 1.
3946: \def\pageone{
3947: \global\pageno=1
3948: \global\arabiccount = \pagecount
3949: }
3950:
3951: \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3952:
3953: % \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} % defined by \CHAPPAGon
3954:
3955: % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3956: % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3957: % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3958: % edge of all pages.
3959: \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdouble}
3960: \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
3961: \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3962: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3963: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3964: \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3965: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3966: \global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3967: \global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
3968: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3969: }
3970:
3971: % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3972: % page number on top right.
3973: \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsingle}
3974: \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3975: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3976: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3977: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3978: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3979: \global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
3980: \global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}}
3981: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3982: }
3983:
3984: % for @setchapternewpage off
3985: \def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{%
3986: \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3987: \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3988: \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3989: \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3990: \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline
3991: \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline
3992: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3993: }
3994:
3995: % Subroutines used in generating headings
3996: % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3997: % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3998: % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3999: \ifx\today\thisisundefined
4000: \def\today{%
4001: \number\day\space
4002: \ifcase\month
4003: \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
4004: \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
4005: \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
4006: \fi
4007: \space\number\year}
4008: \fi
4009:
4010: % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
4011: % It generates no output of its own.
4012: \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
4013: \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
4014:
4015:
4016: \message{tables,}
4017: % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
4018:
4019: % default indentation of table text
4020: \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
4021: % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
4022: \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
4023: % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
4024: \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
4025:
4026: % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
4027: \newdimen\itemmax
4028:
4029: % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
4030: % these defs.
4031: % They also define \itemindex
4032: % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
4033:
4034: \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
4035:
4036: \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
4037:
4038: \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
4039: \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
4040:
4041: \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
4042: \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
4043: \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
4044: \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
4045: \itemindex{#1}%
4046: \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
4047: %
4048: % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
4049: % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
4050: % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
4051: % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
4052: % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
4053: \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
4054: %
4055: % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
4056: % but leave it ragged-right.
4057: \begingroup
4058: \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
4059: \advance\hsize by\tableindent
4060: \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
4061: \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
4062: \endgroup
4063: %
4064: % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
4065: % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
4066: \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
4067: %
4068: % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
4069: % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
4070: % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
4071: % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
4072: % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
4073: % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
4074: %
4075: \penalty 10001
4076: \endgroup
4077: \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
4078: \else
4079: % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
4080: % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
4081: \noindent
4082: % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
4083: % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
4084: % eventually be printed.
4085: \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
4086: \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
4087: \unhbox0
4088: \nobreak\kern\dimen0
4089: \endgroup
4090: \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
4091: \fi
4092: }
4093:
4094: \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
4095: \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
4096:
4097: % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
4098: \envdef\table{%
4099: \let\itemindex\gobble
4100: \tablecheck{table}%
4101: }
4102: \envdef\ftable{%
4103: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
4104: \tablecheck{ftable}%
4105: }
4106: \envdef\vtable{%
4107: \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
4108: \tablecheck{vtable}%
4109: }
4110: \def\tablecheck#1{%
4111: \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
4112: \endgroup
4113: \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
4114: that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
4115: \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
4116: \else
4117: \let\next\tablex
4118: \fi
4119: \next
4120: }
4121: \def\tablex#1{%
4122: \def\itemindicate{#1}%
4123: \parsearg\tabley
4124: }
4125: \def\tabley#1{%
4126: {%
4127: \makevalueexpandable
4128: \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
4129: \expandafter
4130: }\temp \endtablez
4131: }
4132: \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
4133: \aboveenvbreak
4134: \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
4135: \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
4136: \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
4137: \itemmax=\tableindent
4138: \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
4139: \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
4140: \exdentamount=\tableindent
4141: \parindent = 0pt
4142: \parskip = \smallskipamount
4143: \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
4144: \let\item = \internalBitem
4145: \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
4146: }
4147: \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
4148: \let\Eftable\Etable
4149: \let\Evtable\Etable
4150: \let\Eitemize\Etable
4151: \let\Eenumerate\Etable
4152:
4153: % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
4154:
4155: \newcount \itemno
4156:
4157: \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
4158:
4159: \def\doitemize#1{%
4160: \aboveenvbreak
4161: \itemmax=\itemindent
4162: \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
4163: \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4164: \exdentamount=\itemindent
4165: \parindent=0pt
4166: \parskip=\smallskipamount
4167: \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
4168: %
4169: % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
4170: % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
4171: % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
4172: % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
4173: % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
4174: \def\itemcontents{#1}%
4175: \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
4176: %
4177: % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
4178: \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
4179: %
4180: \let\item=\itemizeitem
4181: }
4182:
4183: % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
4184: %
4185: \def\itemizeitem{%
4186: \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
4187: {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
4188: {%
4189: % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
4190: % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
4191: % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
4192: % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
4193: % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
4194: % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
4195: % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
4196: % that's the theory.
4197: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
4198: \noindent
4199: \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
4200: %
4201: \ifinner\else
4202: \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
4203: \fi
4204: % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
4205: % @itemize looks awful there.
4206: }%
4207: \flushcr
4208: }
4209:
4210: % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
4211: % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
4212: %
4213: \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
4214:
4215: % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
4216: % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
4217: % argument is the same as `1'.
4218: %
4219: \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
4220: \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
4221: % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
4222: \def\thearg{#1}%
4223: \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
4224: %
4225: % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
4226: % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
4227: % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
4228: % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
4229: % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
4230: \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
4231: \ifx\rest\empty
4232: % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
4233: % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
4234: % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
4235: % not equal to itself.
4236: % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
4237: %
4238: % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
4239: % continuing to look for a <number>.
4240: %
4241: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
4242: \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
4243: \else
4244: % It's a letter.
4245: \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
4246: \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
4247: \else
4248: \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
4249: \fi
4250: \fi
4251: \else
4252: % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
4253: \numericenumerate
4254: \fi
4255: }
4256:
4257: % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
4258: % given in \thearg.
4259: %
4260: \def\numericenumerate{%
4261: \itemno = \thearg
4262: \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
4263: }
4264:
4265: % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
4266: \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
4267: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
4268: \startenumeration{%
4269: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
4270: \ifnum\itemno=0
4271: \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
4272: alphabet}%
4273: \fi
4274: \char\lccode\itemno
4275: }%
4276: }
4277:
4278: % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
4279: \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
4280: \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
4281: \startenumeration{%
4282: % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
4283: \ifnum\itemno=0
4284: \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
4285: alphabet}
4286: \fi
4287: \char\uccode\itemno
4288: }%
4289: }
4290:
4291: % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
4292: % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
4293: % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
4294: %
4295: \def\startenumeration#1{%
4296: \advance\itemno by -1
4297: \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
4298: }
4299:
4300:
4301: % @multitable macros
4302:
4303: % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
4304: %
4305: \let\endsetuptable\relax
4306: \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
4307: \let\columnfractions\relax
4308: \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
4309: \newif\ifsetpercent
4310:
4311: % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
4312: % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
4313: %
4314: \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
4315: \global\advance\colcount by 1
4316: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
4317: \setuptable
4318: }
4319:
4320: \newcount\colcount
4321: \def\setuptable#1{%
4322: \def\firstarg{#1}%
4323: \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
4324: \let\go = \relax
4325: \else
4326: \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
4327: \global\setpercenttrue
4328: \else
4329: \ifsetpercent
4330: \let\go\pickupwholefraction
4331: \else
4332: \global\advance\colcount by 1
4333: \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
4334: % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
4335: \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
4336: \fi
4337: \fi
4338: \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
4339: % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
4340: % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
4341: \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
4342: \else
4343: \let\go = \setuptable
4344: \fi%
4345: \fi
4346: \go
4347: }
4348:
4349: % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
4350: % have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
4351: % alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
4352: % undo it ourselves.
4353: \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
4354: \def\headitem{%
4355: \crcr % must appear first
4356: \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
4357: \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
4358: \the\everytab % for the first item
4359: }%
4360: %
4361: % default for tables with no headings.
4362: \let\headitemcrhook=\relax
4363: %
4364: \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
4365:
4366: \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
4367: %
4368: \envdef\multitable{%
4369: \vskip\parskip
4370: \startsavinginserts
4371: %
4372: % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
4373: % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
4374: % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
4375: % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
4376: \def\item{\crcr}%
4377: %
4378: \tolerance=9500
4379: \hbadness=9500
4380: \parskip=0pt
4381: \parindent=6pt
4382: \overfullrule=0pt
4383: \global\colcount=0
4384: %
4385: \everycr = {%
4386: \noalign{%
4387: \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
4388: \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
4389: %
4390: % Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
4391: \checkinserts
4392: %
4393: % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
4394: \headitemcrhook
4395: \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
4396: }%
4397: }%
4398: %
4399: \parsearg\domultitable
4400: }
4401: \def\domultitable#1{%
4402: % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
4403: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
4404: %
4405: % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
4406: % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
4407: % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
4408: % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
4409: \halign\bgroup &%
4410: \global\advance\colcount by 1
4411: \strut
4412: \vtop{%
4413: \advance\hsize by -1\leftskip
4414: % Find the correct column width
4415: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
4416: %
4417: \advance\rightskip by -1\rightskip % Zero leaving only any stretch
4418: \ifnum\colcount=1
4419: \advance\hsize by\leftskip % Add indent of surrounding text
4420: \else
4421: % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other.
4422: \leftskip=12pt
4423: \ifsetpercent \else
4424: % If a template has been used
4425: \advance\hsize by \leftskip
4426: \fi
4427: \fi
4428: \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\strut
4429: }\cr
4430: }
4431: \def\Emultitable{%
4432: \crcr
4433: \egroup % end the \halign
4434: \global\setpercentfalse
4435: }
4436:
4437:
4438: \message{conditionals,}
4439:
4440: % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotlatex, @ifnotplaintext,
4441: % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
4442: % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
4443: % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
4444: % attempt to close an environment group.
4445: %
4446: \def\makecond#1{%
4447: \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
4448: \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
4449: }
4450: \makecond{iftex}
4451: \makecond{ifnotdocbook}
4452: \makecond{ifnothtml}
4453: \makecond{ifnotinfo}
4454: \makecond{ifnotlatex}
4455: \makecond{ifnotplaintext}
4456: \makecond{ifnotxml}
4457:
4458: % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
4459: %
4460: \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
4461: \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
4462: \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
4463: \def\html{\doignore{html}}
4464: \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
4465: \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
4466: \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
4467: \def\iflatex{\doignore{iflatex}}
4468: \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
4469: \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
4470: \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
4471: \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
4472: \def\latex{\doignore{latex}}
4473: \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
4474: \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
4475:
4476: % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
4477: %
4478: % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
4479: \newcount\doignorecount
4480:
4481: \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
4482: % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
4483: \obeylines
4484: \catcode`\@ = \other
4485: \catcode`\{ = \other
4486: \catcode`\} = \other
4487: %
4488: % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
4489: \spaceisspace
4490: %
4491: % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
4492: \doignorecount = 0
4493: %
4494: % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
4495: \dodoignore{#1}%
4496: }
4497:
4498: { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
4499: \obeylines %
4500: %
4501: \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
4502: % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
4503: %
4504: % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
4505: \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
4506: \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
4507: %
4508: % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
4509: % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
4510: % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
4511: \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
4512: %
4513: % And now expand that command.
4514: \doignoretext ^^M%
4515: }%
4516: }
4517:
4518: \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
4519: \def\temp{#1}%
4520: \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
4521: \let\next\doignoretextzzz
4522: \else % Found a nested condition, ...
4523: \advance\doignorecount by 1
4524: \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
4525: % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
4526: \fi
4527: \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
4528: }
4529:
4530: % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
4531: %
4532: \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
4533: \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
4534: \let\next\enddoignore
4535: \else % Still inside a nested condition.
4536: \advance\doignorecount by -1
4537: \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
4538: \fi
4539: \next
4540: }
4541:
4542: % Finish off ignored text.
4543: { \obeylines%
4544: % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
4545: % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
4546: % would result in a blank line in the output.
4547: \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
4548: }
4549:
4550:
4551: % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
4552: % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
4553: %
4554: % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
4555: % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
4556: % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
4557: % didn't need it.
4558: % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
4559: %
4560: \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
4561: \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
4562: {%
4563: \makevalueexpandable
4564: \def\temp{#2}%
4565: \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
4566: \ifx\temp\empty
4567: \next{}%
4568: \else
4569: \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
4570: \fi
4571: }%
4572: }
4573: % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
4574: \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
4575:
4576: % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
4577: %
4578: \parseargdef\clear{%
4579: {%
4580: \makevalueexpandable
4581: \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
4582: }%
4583: }
4584:
4585: % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
4586: \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
4587: \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
4588: {
4589: \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
4590: %
4591: \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
4592: \let\value = \expandablevalue
4593: % We don't want these characters active, ...
4594: \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
4595: % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
4596: % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
4597: % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
4598: \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
4599: }
4600: }
4601:
4602: \def\expandablevalue#1{%
4603: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4604: {[No value for ``#1'']}%
4605: \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
4606: \else
4607: \csname SET#1\endcsname
4608: \fi
4609: }
4610:
4611: % Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the
4612: % definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when
4613: % writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does.
4614: % If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it
4615: % will be set by the time it is read back in.
4616: %
4617: % NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here.
4618: \def\dummyvalue#1{%
4619: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4620: \string\value{#1}%
4621: \else
4622: \csname SET#1\endcsname
4623: \fi
4624: }
4625:
4626: % Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value
4627: % if possible, otherwise sort late.
4628: \def\indexnofontsvalue#1{%
4629: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4630: ZZZZZZZ%
4631: \else
4632: \csname SET#1\endcsname
4633: \fi
4634: }
4635:
4636: % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4637: % with @set.
4638: %
4639: % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
4640: % \makecond and then redefine.
4641: %
4642: \makecond{ifset}
4643: \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
4644: \def\doifset#1#2{%
4645: {%
4646: \makevalueexpandable
4647: \let\next=\empty
4648: \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
4649: #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4650: \fi
4651: \expandafter
4652: }\next
4653: }
4654: \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
4655:
4656: % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
4657: % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4658: %
4659: % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4660: % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4661: % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4662: %
4663: \makecond{ifclear}
4664: \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
4665: \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
4666:
4667: % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
4668: % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
4669: % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
4670: % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
4671: %
4672: \makecond{ifcommanddefined}
4673: \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
4674: %
4675: \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
4676: \makevalueexpandable
4677: \let\next=\empty
4678: \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
4679: #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
4680: \fi
4681: \expandafter
4682: }\next
4683: }
4684: \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
4685:
4686: % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
4687: \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
4688: \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
4689: \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
4690: \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
4691:
4692: % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
4693: % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
4694: \set txicommandconditionals
4695:
4696: % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
4697: % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
4698: \let\dircategory=\comment
4699:
4700: % @defininfoenclose.
4701: \let\definfoenclose=\comment
4702:
4703:
4704: \message{indexing,}
4705: % Index generation facilities
4706:
4707: % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4708: % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4709: \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
4710:
4711: % \newindex {IX} defines an index named IX.
4712: % It automatically defines \IXindex such that
4713: % \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
4714: % It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4715: % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX.
4716: %
4717: \def\newindex#1{%
4718: \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
4719: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
4720: \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4721: }
4722:
4723: % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
4724: %
4725: \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4726:
4727: % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4728: %
4729: \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4730: %
4731: \def\newcodeindex#1{%
4732: \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
4733: \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
4734: \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4735: }
4736:
4737: % The default indices:
4738: \newindex{cp}% concepts,
4739: \newcodeindex{fn}% functions,
4740: \newcodeindex{vr}% variables,
4741: \newcodeindex{tp}% types,
4742: \newcodeindex{ky}% keys
4743: \newcodeindex{pg}% and programs.
4744:
4745:
4746: % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
4747: % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4748: %
4749: % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4750: % inside @code.
4751: %
4752: \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4753: \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4754:
4755: % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4756: % #3 the target index (bar).
4757: \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4758: \requireopenindexfile{#3}%
4759: % redefine \fooindfile:
4760: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
4761: \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
4762: % redefine \fooindex:
4763: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4764: }
4765:
4766: % Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
4767: % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4768: % and it is the two-letter name of the index.
4769:
4770: \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
4771: \def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4772:
4773: % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4774: \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
4775: \def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}}
4776:
4777:
4778: % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4779: % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
4780: % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4781: % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4782: % from whatever follows.
4783: %
4784: % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4785: % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4786: % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4787: %
4788: % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4789: % space.
4790: %
4791: \def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}%
4792: \def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}%
4793:
4794: % Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo
4795: % commands. Most of the commands are controlled through the
4796: % \ifdummies conditional.
4797: %
4798: \def\atdummies{%
4799: \dummiestrue
4800: %
4801: \definedummyletter\@%
4802: \definedummyletter\ %
4803: \definedummyletter\{%
4804: \definedummyletter\}%
4805: \definedummyletter\&%
4806: %
4807: \definedummyletter\_%
4808: \definedummyletter\-%
4809: %
4810: \definedummyword\subentry
4811: %
4812: % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4813: \let\commondummyword\definedummyword
4814: \macrolist
4815: \let\value\dummyvalue
4816: %
4817: \turnoffactive
4818: }
4819:
4820: \newif\ifdummies
4821: \newif\ifindexnofonts
4822:
4823: \def\commondummyletter#1{%
4824: \expandafter\let\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname#1%
4825: \edef#1{%
4826: \noexpand\ifindexnofonts
4827: % empty expansion
4828: \noexpand\else
4829: \noexpand\ifdummies\string#1%
4830: \noexpand\else
4831: \noexpand\jumptwofi % dispose of the \fi
4832: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname
4833: \noexpand\fi
4834: \noexpand\fi}%
4835: }
4836:
4837: \def\commondummyaccent#1{%
4838: \expandafter\let\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname#1%
4839: \edef#1{%
4840: \noexpand\ifindexnofonts
4841: \noexpand\expandafter % dispose of \else ... \fi
4842: \noexpand\asis
4843: \noexpand\else
4844: \noexpand\ifdummies\string#1%
4845: \noexpand\else
4846: \noexpand\jumptwofi % dispose of the \fi
4847: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname
4848: \noexpand\fi
4849: \noexpand\fi}%
4850: }
4851:
4852: % Like \commondummyaccent but add a \space at the end of the dummy expansion
4853: % #2 is the expansion used for \indexnofonts. #2 is always followed by
4854: % \asis to remove a pair of following braces.
4855: \def\commondummyword#1#2{%
4856: \expandafter\let\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname#1%
4857: \expandafter\def\csname\string#1:ixnf\endcsname{#2\asis}%
4858: \edef#1{%
4859: \noexpand\ifindexnofonts
4860: \noexpand\expandafter % dispose of \else ... \fi
4861: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:ixnf\endcsname
4862: \noexpand\else
4863: \noexpand\ifdummies\string#1\space
4864: \noexpand\else
4865: \noexpand\jumptwofi % dispose of the \fi \fi
4866: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1:impl\endcsname
4867: \noexpand\fi
4868: \noexpand\fi}%
4869: }
4870: \def\jumptwofi#1\fi\fi{\fi\fi#1}
4871:
4872: % For \atdummies and \indexnofonts. \atdummies sets
4873: % \dummiestrue and \indexnofonts sets \indexnofontstrue.
4874: \def\definedummies{
4875: % @-sign is always an escape character when reading auxiliary files
4876: \escapechar = `\@
4877: %
4878: \commondummyletter\!%
4879: \commondummyaccent\"%
4880: \commondummyaccent\'%
4881: \commondummyletter\*%
4882: \commondummyaccent\,%
4883: \commondummyletter\.%
4884: \commondummyletter\/%
4885: \commondummyletter\:%
4886: \commondummyaccent\=%
4887: \commondummyletter\?%
4888: \commondummyaccent\^%
4889: \commondummyaccent\`%
4890: \commondummyaccent\~%
4891: %
4892: % Control letters and accents.
4893: \commondummyword\u {}%
4894: \commondummyword\v {}%
4895: \commondummyword\H {}%
4896: \commondummyword\dotaccent {}%
4897: \commondummyword\ogonek {}%
4898: \commondummyword\ringaccent {}%
4899: \commondummyword\tieaccent {}%
4900: \commondummyword\ubaraccent {}%
4901: \commondummyword\udotaccent {}%
4902: \commondummyword\dotless {}%
4903: %
4904: % Texinfo font commands.
4905: \commondummyword\b {}%
4906: \commondummyword\i {}%
4907: \commondummyword\r {}%
4908: \commondummyword\sansserif {}%
4909: \commondummyword\sc {}%
4910: \commondummyword\slanted {}%
4911: \commondummyword\t {}%
4912: %
4913: % Commands that take arguments.
4914: \commondummyword\abbr {}%
4915: \commondummyword\acronym {}%
4916: \commondummyword\anchor {}%
4917: \commondummyword\cite {}%
4918: \commondummyword\code {}%
4919: \commondummyword\command {}%
4920: \commondummyword\dfn {}%
4921: \commondummyword\dmn {}%
4922: \commondummyword\email {}%
4923: \commondummyword\emph {}%
4924: \commondummyword\env {}%
4925: \commondummyword\file {}%
4926: \commondummyword\image {}%
4927: \commondummyword\indicateurl{}%
4928: \commondummyword\inforef {}%
4929: \commondummyword\kbd {}%
4930: \commondummyword\key {}%
4931: \commondummyword\link {}%
4932: \commondummyword\math {}%
4933: \commondummyword\option {}%
4934: \commondummyword\pxref {}%
4935: \commondummyword\ref {}%
4936: \commondummyword\samp {}%
4937: \commondummyword\strong {}%
4938: \commondummyword\tie {}%
4939: \commondummyword\U {}%
4940: \commondummyword\uref {}%
4941: \commondummyword\url {}%
4942: \commondummyword\var {}%
4943: \commondummyword\verb {}%
4944: \commondummyword\w {}%
4945: \commondummyword\xref {}%
4946: %
4947: \commondummyword\AA {AA}%
4948: \commondummyword\AE {AE}%
4949: \commondummyword\DH {DZZ}%
4950: \commondummyword\L {L}%
4951: \commondummyword\O {O}%
4952: \commondummyword\OE {OE}%
4953: \commondummyword\TH {TH}%
4954: \commondummyword\aa {aa}%
4955: \commondummyword\ae {ae}%
4956: \commondummyword\dh {dzz}%
4957: \commondummyword\exclamdown {!}%
4958: \commondummyword\l {l}%
4959: \commondummyword\o {o}%
4960: \commondummyword\oe {oe}%
4961: \commondummyword\ordf {a}%
4962: \commondummyword\ordm {o}%
4963: \commondummyword\questiondown {?}%
4964: \commondummyword\ss {ss}%
4965: \commondummyword\th {th}%
4966: %
4967: \commondummyword\LaTeX {LaTeX}%
4968: \commondummyword\TeX {TeX}%
4969: %
4970: % Assorted special characters.
4971: \commondummyword\ampchar {\normalamp}%
4972: \commondummyword\atchar {\@}%
4973: \commondummyword\arrow {->}%
4974: \commondummyword\backslashchar {\realbackslash}%
4975: \commondummyword\bullet {bullet}%
4976: \commondummyword\comma {,}%
4977: \commondummyword\copyright {copyright}%
4978: \commondummyword\dots {...}%
4979: \commondummyword\enddots {...}%
4980: \commondummyword\entrybreak {}%
4981: \commondummyword\equiv {===}%
4982: \commondummyword\error {error}%
4983: \commondummyword\euro {euro}%
4984: \commondummyword\expansion {==>}%
4985: \commondummyword\geq {>=}%
4986: \commondummyword\guillemetleft {<<}%
4987: \commondummyword\guillemetright {>>}%
4988: \commondummyword\guilsinglleft {<}%
4989: \commondummyword\guilsinglright {>}%
4990: \commondummyword\lbracechar {\{}%
4991: \commondummyword\leq {<=}%
4992: \commondummyword\mathopsup {sup}%
4993: \commondummyword\minus {-}%
4994: \commondummyword\pounds {pounds}%
4995: \commondummyword\point {.}%
4996: \commondummyword\print {-|}%
4997: \commondummyword\quotedblbase {"}%
4998: \commondummyword\quotedblleft {"}%
4999: \commondummyword\quotedblright {"}%
5000: \commondummyword\quoteleft {`}%
5001: \commondummyword\quoteright {'}%
5002: \commondummyword\quotesinglbase {,}%
5003: \commondummyword\rbracechar {\}}%
5004: \commondummyword\registeredsymbol {R}%
5005: \commondummyword\result {=>}%
5006: \commondummyword\sub {}%
5007: \commondummyword\sup {}%
5008: \commondummyword\textdegree {o}%
5009: }
5010:
5011: \let\indexlbrace\relax
5012: \let\indexrbrace\relax
5013: \let\indexatchar\relax
5014: \let\indexbackslash\relax
5015:
5016: {\catcode`\@=0
5017: \catcode`\\=13
5018: @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
5019: }
5020:
5021: {
5022: \catcode`\<=13
5023: \catcode`\-=13
5024: \catcode`\`=13
5025: \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
5026: \ifflagclear{txiindexlquoteignore}{}{%
5027: % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
5028: % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
5029: \let`=\empty
5030: }%
5031: %
5032: \ifflagclear{txiindexbackslashignore}{}{%
5033: \backslashdisappear
5034: }%
5035: \ifflagclear{txiindexhyphenignore}{}{%
5036: \def-{}%
5037: }%
5038: \ifflagclear{txiindexlessthanignore}{}{%
5039: \def<{}%
5040: }%
5041: \ifflagclear{txiindexatsignignore}{}{%
5042: \def\@{}%
5043: }%
5044: }
5045:
5046: \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
5047: \let-\normaldash
5048: \let<\normalless
5049: }
5050: }
5051:
5052:
5053: % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
5054: % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
5055: % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
5056: % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
5057: %
5058: \def\indexnofonts{%
5059: \indexnofontstrue
5060: %
5061: \def\ { }%
5062: \def\@{@}%
5063: \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
5064: \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
5065: %
5066: \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
5067: \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
5068: \let\lbracechar\{%
5069: \let\rbracechar\}%
5070: %
5071: %
5072: % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
5073: % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
5074: %
5075: % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
5076: % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
5077: % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
5078: %
5079: \def\commondummyword##1{\let##1\asis}%
5080: \macrolist
5081: \let\value\indexnofontsvalue
5082: }
5083:
5084:
5085:
5086:
5087: % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
5088: \def\doind#1#2{%
5089: \iflinks
5090: {%
5091: %
5092: \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
5093: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
5094: %
5095: \def\indextext{#2}%
5096: \safewhatsit\doindwrite
5097: }%
5098: \fi
5099: }
5100:
5101: % Same as \doind, but for code indices
5102: \def\docind#1#2{%
5103: \iflinks
5104: {%
5105: %
5106: \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
5107: \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
5108: %
5109: \def\indextext{#2}%
5110: \safewhatsit\docindwrite
5111: }%
5112: \fi
5113: }
5114:
5115: % Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
5116: \def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
5117: \ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
5118: \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
5119: \edef\suffix{#1}%
5120: % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
5121: % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
5122: \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
5123: % Open the file
5124: \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
5125: % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current
5126: % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for
5127: % preceding skips.
5128: \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}%
5129: \fi}
5130: \def\indexisfl{fl}
5131:
5132: % Definition for writing index entry sort key.
5133: {
5134: \catcode`\-=13
5135: \gdef\indexwritesortas{%
5136: \begingroup
5137: \indexnonalnumreappear
5138: \indexwritesortasxxx}
5139: \gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
5140: \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
5141: }
5142:
5143: \def\indexwriteseealso#1{
5144: \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}%
5145: }
5146: \def\indexwriteseeentry#1{
5147: \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}%
5148: }
5149:
5150: % The default definitions
5151: \def\sortas#1{}%
5152: \def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
5153: \def\putwordSeeAlso{See also}
5154: \def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only
5155:
5156:
5157: % Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}":
5158: % * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}"
5159: % * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ"
5160: % * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext
5161: %
5162: \def\splitindexentry#1{%
5163: \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}%
5164: \xdef\bracedtext{}%
5165: \def\sep{}%
5166: \def\seealso##1{}%
5167: \def\seeentry##1{}%
5168: \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry
5169: }
5170:
5171: % append the results from the next segment
5172: \def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{%
5173: \def\segment{#1}%
5174: \ifx\segment\isfinish
5175: \else
5176: %
5177: % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and
5178: % trim spaces.
5179: \edef\trimmed{\segment}%
5180: \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
5181: \ifincodeindex
5182: \edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}%
5183: \fi
5184: %
5185: \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}%
5186: %
5187: % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all
5188: % font commands turned off.
5189: \bgroup
5190: \let\sortas\indexwritesortas
5191: \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso
5192: \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry
5193: \indexnofonts
5194: % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex.
5195: \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}%
5196: \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}%
5197: \let\{=\lbracechar
5198: \let\}=\rbracechar
5199: \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}%
5200: \def\atchar##1{\@}%
5201: \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}%
5202: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}%
5203: %
5204: \let\indexsortkey\empty
5205: \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty
5206: % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes
5207: % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment.
5208: \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}%
5209: \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{%
5210: \indexnonalnumdisappear
5211: \xdef\trimmed{\segment}%
5212: \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}%
5213: \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}%
5214: \ifx\indexsortkey\empty
5215: \message{Empty index sort key near line \the\inputlineno}%
5216: \xdef\indexsortkey{ }%
5217: \fi
5218: }\fi
5219: %
5220: % Append to \fullindexsortkey.
5221: \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{%
5222: \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}%
5223: \tmp
5224: \egroup
5225: \def\sep{\subentry}%
5226: %
5227: \expandafter\doindexsegment
5228: \fi
5229: }
5230: \def\isfinish{\finish}%
5231: \newbox\dummybox % used above
5232:
5233: \let\subentry\relax
5234:
5235: % Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex.
5236: % This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux
5237: % files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses
5238: % the current value of \escapechar.
5239: \def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\}
5240:
5241: % Uncomment to use \ in index files by default. Old texi2dvi (before 2019)
5242: % didn't support @ as the escape character (as it checked for "\entry" in
5243: % the files, and not "@entry").
5244: % In the future we can remove this flag and simplify the code for
5245: % index files and backslashes, once the support is no longer likely to be
5246: % useful.
5247: %
5248: % \set txiindexescapeisbackslash
5249:
5250: % Write the entry in \indextext to the index file.
5251: %
5252:
5253: \newif\ifincodeindex
5254: \def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex}
5255: \def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex}
5256:
5257: \def\doindwritex{%
5258: \maybemarginindex
5259: %
5260: \atdummies
5261: %
5262: \ifflagclear{txiindexescapeisbackslash}{}{\escapeisbackslash}%
5263: %
5264: % For texindex which always views { and } as separators.
5265: \def\{{\lbracechar{}}%
5266: \def\}{\rbracechar{}}%
5267: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}%
5268: %
5269: % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index
5270: % sort key.
5271: \splitindexentry\indextext
5272: %
5273: % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
5274: % the original text, including any font commands. We write
5275: % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
5276: % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
5277: % sorted result.
5278: %
5279: \edef\temp{%
5280: \write\writeto{%
5281: \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}%
5282: {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}%
5283: \bracedtext}%
5284: }%
5285: \temp
5286: }
5287:
5288: % Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented).
5289: \def\maybemarginindex{%
5290: \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
5291: \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}%
5292: \fi
5293: }
5294: \let\SETmarginindex=\relax
5295:
5296:
5297: % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
5298: %
5299: % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
5300: % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
5301: % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
5302: % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
5303: % sequences like this:
5304: % @end defun
5305: % @tindex whatever
5306: % @defun ...
5307: % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
5308: % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
5309: % the previous defun.
5310: %
5311: % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
5312: % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
5313: %
5314: % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
5315: %
5316: % But wait, there is a catch there:
5317: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
5318: % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
5319: % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
5320: % representation of the skip.
5321: %
5322: % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
5323: % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
5324: %
5325: \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
5326: %
5327: \newskip\whatsitskip
5328: \newcount\whatsitpenalty
5329: %
5330: % ..., ready, GO:
5331: %
5332: \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
5333: #1%
5334: \else
5335: % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
5336: \whatsitskip = \lastskip
5337: \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
5338: \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
5339: %
5340: % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
5341: % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
5342: % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
5343: % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
5344: % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
5345: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
5346: \else
5347: \vskip-\whatsitskip
5348: \fi
5349: %
5350: #1%
5351: %
5352: \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
5353: % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
5354: % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
5355: % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
5356: % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
5357: % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
5358: % @deffn deffn-whatever
5359: % @vindex index-whatever
5360: % Description.
5361: % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
5362: % and the "Description." paragraph.
5363: \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
5364: \else
5365: % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
5366: % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
5367: % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
5368: \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
5369: \fi
5370: \fi}
5371:
5372: % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
5373: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
5374: % or
5375: % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
5376: % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
5377: % containing these kinds of lines:
5378: % \initial {c}
5379: % before the first topic whose initial is c
5380: % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
5381: % for a topic that is used without subtopics
5382: % \primary {topic}
5383: % \entry {topic}{}
5384: % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
5385: % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
5386: % for each subtopic.
5387: % \secondary {subtopic}{}
5388: % for a subtopic with sub-subtopics
5389: % \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist}
5390: % for each sub-subtopic.
5391:
5392: % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
5393: % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
5394:
5395: \def\findex {\fnindex}
5396: \def\kindex {\kyindex}
5397: \def\cindex {\cpindex}
5398: \def\vindex {\vrindex}
5399: \def\tindex {\tpindex}
5400: \def\pindex {\pgindex}
5401:
5402: % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
5403:
5404: % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
5405: % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
5406: %
5407: \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
5408: \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
5409: %
5410: \smallfonts \rm
5411: \tolerance = 9500
5412: \plainfrenchspacing
5413: \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
5414: %
5415: % See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
5416: \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
5417: %
5418: % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
5419: \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
5420: \ifeof 1
5421: % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
5422: % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
5423: % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
5424: % there is some text.
5425: \putwordIndexNonexistent
5426: \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}%
5427: \else
5428: % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
5429: % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
5430: % it can discover if there is anything in it.
5431: \read 1 to \thisline
5432: \ifeof 1
5433: \putwordIndexIsEmpty
5434: \else
5435: \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish%
5436: \fi
5437: \fi
5438: \closein 1
5439: \endgroup}
5440:
5441: % If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index
5442: % file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have
5443: % old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would
5444: % at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error.
5445: \def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{%
5446: \ifflagclear{txiindexescapeisbackslash}{%
5447: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1
5448: \ifflagclear{txiskipindexfileswithbackslash}{%
5449: \errmessage{%
5450: ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped.
5451: To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi'
5452: or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>.
5453: If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo
5454: distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0).
5455: You may be able to typeset the index if you run
5456: 'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself.
5457: You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by
5458: running a command like
5459: 'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do
5460: this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format.
5461: If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again
5462: might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')%
5463: }%
5464: }{%
5465: (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format)
5466: }%
5467: \else
5468: \begindoublecolumns
5469: \input \jobname.\indexname s
5470: \enddoublecolumns
5471: \fi
5472: }{%
5473: \begindoublecolumns
5474: \catcode`\\=0\relax
5475: %
5476: % Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This
5477: % should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files.
5478: %\catcode`\@=12\relax
5479: \catcode`\@=0\relax
5480: \input \jobname.\indexname s
5481: \enddoublecolumns
5482: }%
5483: }
5484:
5485: % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
5486: % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
5487:
5488: {\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13
5489: \catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13
5490: \catcode`\$=3
5491: \gdef\initialglyphs{%
5492: % special control sequences used in the index sort key
5493: \let\indexlbrace\{%
5494: \let\indexrbrace\}%
5495: \let\indexatchar\@%
5496: \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
5497: %
5498: % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the
5499: % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
5500: % for these characters.
5501: \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}}
5502: %
5503: % In case @\ is used for backslash
5504: \uppercase{\let\\=~}
5505: % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
5506: \catcode`\/=13
5507: \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
5508: \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
5509: \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
5510: \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
5511: \def\_{%
5512: \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }%
5513: \def|{$\vert$}%
5514: \def<{$\less$}%
5515: \def>{$\gtr$}%
5516: \def+{$\normalplus$}%
5517: }}
5518:
5519: \def\initial{%
5520: \bgroup
5521: \initialglyphs
5522: \initialx
5523: }
5524:
5525: \def\initialx#1{%
5526: % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
5527: \removelastskip
5528: %
5529: % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
5530: % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
5531: % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
5532: \nobreak
5533: \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
5534: \penalty -300
5535: \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
5536: %
5537: % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
5538: % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
5539: % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
5540: % we need before each entry, but it's better.
5541: %
5542: % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
5543: \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip
5544: \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}%
5545: % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
5546: % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
5547: % \leftline creates.
5548: % Do our best not to break after the initial.
5549: \nobreak
5550: \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
5551: \egroup % \initialglyphs
5552: }
5553:
5554: \newdimen\entryrightmargin
5555: \entryrightmargin=0pt
5556:
5557: % amount to indent subsequent lines in an entry when it spans more than
5558: % one line.
5559: \newdimen\entrycontskip
5560: \entrycontskip=1em
5561:
5562: % for PDF output, whether to make the text of the entry a link to the page
5563: % number. set for @contents and @shortcontents where there is only one
5564: % page number.
5565: \newif\iflinkentrytext
5566:
5567: % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
5568: % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
5569: % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
5570: %
5571: \def\entry{%
5572: \begingroup
5573: %
5574: % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
5575: % affect previous text.
5576: \par
5577: %
5578: % No extra space above this paragraph.
5579: \parskip = 0in
5580: %
5581: % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
5582: % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
5583: % titles, for instance.
5584: \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5585: \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
5586: %
5587: % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
5588: \afterassignment\doentry
5589: \let\temp =
5590: }
5591: \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5592: \def\doentry{%
5593: % Save the text of the entry in \boxA
5594: \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
5595: \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
5596: \noindent
5597: \aftergroup\finishentry
5598: % And now comes the text of the entry.
5599: % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
5600: % with catcodes occurring.
5601: }
5602: {\catcode`\@=11
5603: % #1 is the page number
5604: \gdef\finishentry#1{%
5605: \egroup % end \boxA
5606: \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
5607: % add any leaders and page number to \boxA.
5608: \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
5609: \ifpdforxetex
5610: \iflinkentrytext
5611: \pdflinkpage{#1}{\unhbox\boxA}%
5612: \else
5613: \unhbox\boxA
5614: \fi
5615: \else
5616: \unhbox\boxA
5617: \fi
5618: %
5619: % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
5620: % leaders if they are present.
5621: \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}%
5622: \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
5623: \null\nobreak\hfill\ %
5624: \else
5625: %
5626: \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
5627: %
5628: \ifpdforxetex
5629: \pdfgettoks#1.%
5630: \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
5631: \else
5632: \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
5633: \fi
5634: \fi
5635: \egroup % end \boxA
5636: %
5637: % now output
5638: \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
5639: \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par
5640: \nobreak
5641: \else\bgroup
5642: % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
5643: % page numbers to be aligned to the right.
5644: %
5645: \parindent = 0pt
5646: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil
5647: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill
5648: \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil
5649: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill
5650: % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
5651: % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
5652: \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill
5653: %
5654: \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin
5655: %
5656: \dimen@ii = \hsize
5657: \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip
5658: \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin
5659: \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line
5660: \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text
5661: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right
5662: %
5663: % Indent all lines but the first one.
5664: \advance\leftskip by \entrycontskip
5665: \advance\parindent by -\entrycontskip
5666: \fi\fi
5667: \indent % start paragraph
5668: \unhbox\boxA
5669: %
5670: % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
5671: \finalhyphendemerits = 0
5672: %
5673: % Word spacing - no stretch
5674: \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font
5675: %
5676: \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks.
5677: \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation.
5678: %
5679: \par % format the paragraph
5680: \egroup % The \vbox
5681: \fi
5682: \endgroup
5683: }}
5684:
5685: \newskip\thinshrinkable
5686: \skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em
5687:
5688: % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 0.5 em.
5689: % The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
5690: % the page number to the right.
5691: \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
5692: \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 0.5em plus 1filll}
5693:
5694: \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
5695:
5696: \def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}}
5697: \def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}}
5698:
5699: \def\indententry#1#2#3{%
5700: \bgroup
5701: \leftskip=#1
5702: \entry{#2}{#3}%
5703: \egroup
5704: }
5705:
5706: % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
5707: % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
5708: % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
5709: \catcode`\@=11 % private names
5710:
5711: \newbox\partialpage
5712: \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
5713:
5714: \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
5715: % If not much space left on page, start a new page.
5716: \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
5717: %
5718: % Grab any single-column material above us.
5719: \output = {%
5720: \savetopmark
5721: %
5722: \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
5723: % Unvbox the main output page.
5724: \unvbox\PAGE
5725: \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
5726: }%
5727: }%
5728: \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
5729: %
5730: % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
5731: \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
5732: %
5733: % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
5734: % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
5735: % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
5736: % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
5737: % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
5738: %
5739: % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
5740: % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
5741: % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
5742: % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
5743: % as it did when we hard-coded it.
5744: %
5745: % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumnhsize, so we
5746: % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
5747: % been clobbered.
5748: %
5749: \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
5750: \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
5751: \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
5752: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5753: %
5754: % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
5755: % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
5756: % previous page.
5757: \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
5758: \vsize = 2\vsize
5759: %
5760: % For the benefit of balancing columns
5761: \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt
5762: }
5763:
5764: % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
5765: % the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
5766: %
5767: \def\doublecolumnout{%
5768: %
5769: \savetopmark
5770: \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
5771: \dimen@ = \vsize
5772: \divide\dimen@ by 2
5773: %
5774: % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
5775: \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@
5776: \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage
5777: \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called
5778: \unvbox\PAGE
5779: \penalty\outputpenalty
5780: }
5781: %
5782: % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
5783: % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
5784: \def\pagesofar{%
5785: \unvbox\partialpage
5786: %
5787: \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5788: \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
5789: \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
5790: }
5791:
5792:
5793: % Finished with double columns.
5794: \def\enddoublecolumns{%
5795: % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
5796: % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
5797: % following situation:
5798: %
5799: % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
5800: % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
5801: % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
5802: % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
5803: % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
5804: % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
5805: % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
5806: % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
5807: % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
5808: % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
5809: % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
5810: % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
5811: % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
5812: % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
5813: % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
5814: % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
5815: % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
5816: % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see
5817: % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
5818: %
5819: % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
5820: % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
5821: \penalty0
5822: %
5823: \output = {%
5824: % Split the last of the double-column material.
5825: \savetopmark
5826: \balancecolumns
5827: }%
5828: \eject % call the \output just set
5829: \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt
5830: % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
5831: % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
5832: % definition right away.
5833: \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput}
5834: %
5835: \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
5836: % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
5837: % page break.
5838: \box\balancedcolumns
5839: %
5840: % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
5841: % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
5842: % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
5843: \global\vsize = \txipageheight %
5844: \pagegoal = \txipageheight %
5845: \else
5846: % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout
5847: % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again.
5848: \expandafter\enddoublecolumns
5849: \fi
5850: }
5851: \newbox\balancedcolumns
5852: \setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}%
5853: %
5854: % Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout
5855: % does the others.
5856: \def\balancecolumns{%
5857: \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
5858: \dimen@ = \ht0
5859: \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip
5860: % Don't split a short final column in two.
5861: \setbox2=\vbox{}%
5862: \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
5863: \else
5864: % double the leading vertical space
5865: \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
5866: \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
5867: \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
5868: \dimen@ii = \dimen@
5869: \splittopskip = \topskip
5870: % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column.
5871: {%
5872: \vbadness = 10000
5873: \loop
5874: \global\setbox3 = \copy0
5875: \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
5876: \ifdim\ht1<\ht3
5877: \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
5878: \repeat
5879: }%
5880: % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3.
5881: %
5882: % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself.
5883: % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so
5884: % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize).
5885: \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize
5886: % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material.
5887: % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page.
5888: \setbox\PAGE=\box0
5889: \doublecolumnout
5890: \else
5891: % Compare the heights of the two columns.
5892: \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3
5893: % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
5894: % flush with each other.
5895: \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}%
5896: \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}%
5897: \else
5898: % Make column bottoms flush with each other.
5899: \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}%
5900: \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}%
5901: \fi
5902: \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
5903: \fi
5904: \fi
5905: %
5906: }
5907: \catcode`\@ = \other
5908:
5909:
5910: \message{sectioning,}
5911: % Chapters, sections, etc.
5912:
5913: % Let's start with @part.
5914: \parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
5915: \def\partzzz#1{%
5916: \chapoddpage
5917: \null
5918: \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
5919: \begingroup
5920: \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text
5921: \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with
5922: \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
5923: \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
5924: % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
5925: % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
5926: \let\pchapsepmacro\relax
5927: \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
5928: \chapoddpage
5929: \endgroup
5930: }
5931:
5932: % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
5933: % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
5934: % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
5935: % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
5936: % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
5937: \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
5938: \newcount\chapno
5939: \newcount\secno \secno=0
5940: \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
5941: \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
5942:
5943: % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
5944: \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
5945: %
5946: % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
5947: % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
5948: % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
5949: % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
5950: %
5951: \def\appendixletter{%
5952: \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
5953: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
5954: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
5955: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
5956: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
5957: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
5958: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
5959: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
5960: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
5961: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
5962: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
5963: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
5964: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
5965: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
5966: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
5967: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
5968: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
5969: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
5970: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
5971: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
5972: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
5973: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
5974: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
5975: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
5976: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
5977: \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
5978: % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5979: % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
5980: % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5981: % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5982: \else\char\the\appendixno
5983: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5984: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5985:
5986: % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5987: % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
5988: % these. @section does likewise.
5989: \def\thischapter{}
5990: \def\thischapternum{}
5991: \def\thischaptername{}
5992: \def\thissection{}
5993: \def\thissectionnum{}
5994: \def\thissectionname{}
5995:
5996: \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5997: \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5998:
5999: % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
6000: \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
6001:
6002: % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
6003: \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
6004:
6005: % we only have subsub.
6006: \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
6007: %
6008: % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
6009: % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
6010: \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
6011: %
6012: % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
6013: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
6014: \def\chapheadtype{N}
6015:
6016: % Choose a heading macro
6017: % #1 is heading type
6018: % #2 is heading level
6019: % #3 is text for heading
6020: \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
6021: % Compute the abs. sec. level:
6022: \absseclevel=#2
6023: \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
6024: % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
6025: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
6026: \absseclevel = 0
6027: \else
6028: \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
6029: \absseclevel = 3
6030: \fi
6031: \fi
6032: % The heading type:
6033: \def\headtype{#1}%
6034: \if \headtype U%
6035: \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
6036: \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
6037: \fi
6038: \else
6039: % Check for appendix sections:
6040: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
6041: \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
6042: \else
6043: \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
6044: \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
6045: \fi\fi
6046: \fi
6047: % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
6048: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
6049: \def\headtype{U}%
6050: \else
6051: \chardef\unnlevel = 3
6052: \fi
6053: \fi
6054: % Now print the heading:
6055: \if \headtype U%
6056: \ifcase\absseclevel
6057: \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
6058: \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
6059: \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
6060: \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
6061: \fi
6062: \else
6063: \if \headtype A%
6064: \ifcase\absseclevel
6065: \appendixzzz{#3}%
6066: \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
6067: \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
6068: \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
6069: \fi
6070: \else
6071: \ifcase\absseclevel
6072: \chapterzzz{#3}%
6073: \or \seczzz{#3}%
6074: \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
6075: \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
6076: \fi
6077: \fi
6078: \fi
6079: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
6080: }
6081:
6082: % an interface:
6083: \def\numhead{\genhead N}
6084: \def\apphead{\genhead A}
6085: \def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
6086:
6087: % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
6088: % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
6089: %
6090: % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
6091: % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
6092: \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
6093: %
6094: \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
6095: \def\chapterzzz#1{%
6096: % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
6097: % as an @include file.
6098: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
6099: \global\advance\chapno by 1
6100: %
6101: % Used for \float.
6102: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
6103: \resetallfloatnos
6104: %
6105: % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
6106: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
6107: \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
6108: %
6109: % Write the actual heading.
6110: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
6111: %
6112: % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
6113: \global\let\section = \numberedsec
6114: \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
6115: \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
6116: }
6117:
6118: \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
6119: %
6120: \def\appendixzzz#1{%
6121: \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
6122: \global\advance\appendixno by 1
6123: \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
6124: \resetallfloatnos
6125: %
6126: % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
6127: \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
6128: \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
6129: %
6130: \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
6131: %
6132: \global\let\section = \appendixsec
6133: \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
6134: \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
6135: }
6136:
6137: % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
6138: \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
6139: \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
6140: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
6141: %
6142: % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
6143: \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
6144: \resetallfloatnos
6145: %
6146: % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
6147: % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
6148: % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
6149: % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
6150: % to be executed, not expanded).
6151: %
6152: % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
6153: % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
6154: % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
6155: % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
6156: % the toc entries.)
6157: \toks0 = {#1}%
6158: \message{(\the\toks0)}%
6159: %
6160: \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
6161: %
6162: \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
6163: \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
6164: \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
6165: }
6166:
6167: % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
6168: \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
6169: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
6170: \unnmhead0{#1}%
6171: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
6172: }
6173:
6174: % @top is like @unnumbered.
6175: \let\top\unnumbered
6176:
6177: % Sections.
6178: %
6179: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
6180: \def\seczzz#1{%
6181: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
6182: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
6183: }
6184:
6185: % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
6186: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
6187: \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
6188: \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
6189: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
6190: }
6191: \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
6192:
6193: % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
6194: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
6195: \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
6196: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
6197: \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
6198: }
6199:
6200: % Subsections.
6201: %
6202: % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
6203: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
6204: \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
6205: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
6206: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
6207: }
6208:
6209: % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
6210: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
6211: \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
6212: \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
6213: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
6214: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
6215: }
6216:
6217: % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
6218: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
6219: \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
6220: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
6221: \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
6222: }
6223:
6224: % Subsubsections.
6225: %
6226: % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
6227: \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
6228: \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
6229: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
6230: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
6231: {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
6232: }
6233:
6234: % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
6235: \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
6236: \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
6237: \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
6238: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
6239: {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
6240: }
6241:
6242: % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
6243: \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
6244: \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
6245: \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
6246: \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
6247: }
6248:
6249: % These macros control what the section commands do, according
6250: % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
6251: % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
6252: \let\section = \numberedsec
6253: \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
6254: \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
6255:
6256: % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
6257:
6258: \def\majorheading{%
6259: {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
6260: \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
6261: }
6262:
6263: \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
6264: \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
6265: \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
6266: \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
6267: \suppressfirstparagraphindent
6268: }
6269:
6270: % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
6271: \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
6272: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
6273: \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
6274: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
6275: \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
6276: \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
6277:
6278: % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
6279: % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
6280: % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
6281:
6282: % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
6283: \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
6284:
6285: % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
6286: \newskip\chapheadingskip
6287:
6288: % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
6289: \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
6290:
6291: % Start a new page
6292: \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
6293:
6294: % \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
6295: % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
6296: % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
6297: % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
6298: \def\chapoddpage{%
6299: \chappager
6300: \ifodd\pageno \else
6301: \begingroup
6302: \headingsoff
6303: \null
6304: \chappager
6305: \endgroup
6306: \fi
6307: }
6308:
6309: \parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname\HEADINGSon}
6310:
6311: \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
6312: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
6313: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
6314: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}}
6315:
6316: \def\CHAPPAGon{%
6317: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
6318: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
6319: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
6320:
6321: \def\CHAPPAGodd{%
6322: \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
6323: \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
6324: \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
6325:
6326: \setchapternewpage on
6327:
6328: % \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
6329: %
6330: % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
6331: % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
6332: % Not used for @heading series.
6333: %
6334: % To test against our argument.
6335: \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
6336: \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
6337: \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
6338: %
6339: %
6340: % Definitions for @thischapter. These can be overridden in translation
6341: % files.
6342: \def\thischapterAppendix{%
6343: \putwordAppendix{} \thischapternum: \thischaptername}
6344:
6345: \def\thischapterChapter{%
6346: \putwordChapter{} \thischapternum: \thischaptername}
6347: %
6348: %
6349: \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
6350: \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
6351: \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
6352: \fi
6353: % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
6354: \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
6355: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
6356: \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
6357: \gdef\thissection{}}%
6358: %
6359: \def\temptype{#2}%
6360: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6361: \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
6362: \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
6363: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6364: \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
6365: \gdef\thischapter{}}%
6366: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6367: \toks0={#1}%
6368: \xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
6369: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
6370: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
6371: \let\noexpand\thischapter\noexpand\thischapterAppendix
6372: }%
6373: \else
6374: \toks0={#1}%
6375: \xdef\currentchapterdefs{%
6376: \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
6377: \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
6378: \let\noexpand\thischapter\noexpand\thischapterChapter
6379: }%
6380: \fi\fi\fi
6381: %
6382: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
6383: % the preceding space.
6384: \safewhatsit\domark
6385: %
6386: % Insert the chapter heading break.
6387: \pchapsepmacro
6388: %
6389: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
6390: % between here and the heading.
6391: \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs
6392: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
6393: \domark
6394: %
6395: {%
6396: \chapfonts \rm
6397: \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
6398: %
6399: % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the
6400: % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
6401: % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
6402: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
6403: %
6404: % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
6405: % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
6406: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6407: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
6408: \def\toctype{unnchap}%
6409: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6410: \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
6411: \def\toctype{omit}%
6412: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6413: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
6414: \def\toctype{app}%
6415: \else
6416: \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
6417: \def\toctype{numchap}%
6418: \fi\fi\fi
6419: %
6420: % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
6421: % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
6422: % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
6423: \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
6424: %
6425: % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
6426: % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
6427: % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
6428: % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
6429: % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
6430: \donoderef{#2}%
6431: %
6432: % Typeset the actual heading.
6433: \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
6434: \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
6435: \unhbox0 #1\par}%
6436: }%
6437: \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
6438: \nobreak
6439: }
6440:
6441: % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
6442: \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
6443: \def\centerparameters{%
6444: \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
6445: \leftskip = \rightskip
6446: \parfillskip = 0pt
6447: }
6448:
6449:
6450: % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
6451: % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
6452: %
6453: \newskip\secheadingskip
6454: \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
6455:
6456: % Subsection titles.
6457: \newskip\subsecheadingskip
6458: \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
6459:
6460: % Subsubsection titles.
6461: \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
6462: \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
6463:
6464: % Definition for @thissection. This can be overridden in translation
6465: % files.
6466: \def\thissectionDef{%
6467: \putwordSection{} \thissectionnum: \thissectionname}
6468: %
6469:
6470:
6471: % Print any size, any type, section title.
6472: %
6473: % #1 is the text of the title,
6474: % #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
6475: % #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
6476: % #4 is the section number.
6477: %
6478: \def\seckeyword{sec}
6479: %
6480: \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
6481: {%
6482: \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
6483: \def\temptype{#3}%
6484: %
6485: % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
6486: % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
6487: % dubious), but not the others.
6488: \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
6489: \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
6490: \fi
6491: \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
6492: %
6493: % Switch to the right set of fonts.
6494: \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
6495: %
6496: % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
6497: \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
6498: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6499: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
6500: \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
6501: \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
6502: \fi
6503: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6504: % Don't redefine \thissection.
6505: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6506: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
6507: \toks0={#1}%
6508: \xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
6509: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
6510: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
6511: \let\noexpand\thissection\noexpand\thissectionDef
6512: }%
6513: \fi
6514: \else
6515: \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
6516: \toks0={#1}%
6517: \xdef\currentsectiondefs{%
6518: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
6519: \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
6520: \let\noexpand\thissection\noexpand\thissectionDef
6521: }%
6522: \fi
6523: \fi\fi\fi
6524: %
6525: % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
6526: % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
6527: % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
6528: \par
6529: %
6530: % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
6531: % the preceding space.
6532: \safewhatsit\domark
6533: %
6534: % Insert space above the heading.
6535: \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
6536: %
6537: % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
6538: % between here and the heading.
6539: \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs
6540: \domark
6541: %
6542: % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
6543: \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6544: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
6545: \def\toctype{unn}%
6546: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
6547: \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6548: % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
6549: % and don't redefine \currentsection.
6550: \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
6551: \def\toctype{omit}%
6552: \let\sectionlevel=\empty
6553: \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6554: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
6555: \def\toctype{app}%
6556: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
6557: \else
6558: \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
6559: \def\toctype{num}%
6560: \gdef\currentsection{#1}%
6561: \fi\fi\fi
6562: %
6563: % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
6564: \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
6565: %
6566: % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
6567: % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
6568: \donoderef{#3}%
6569: %
6570: % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
6571: % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
6572: % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
6573: % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
6574: % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
6575: % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
6576: \nobreak
6577: %
6578: % Output the actual section heading.
6579: \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
6580: \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
6581: \unhbox0 #1}%
6582: }%
6583: % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
6584: % Don't allow stretch, though.
6585: \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
6586: %
6587: % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
6588: % was followed by glue.
6589: \nobreak
6590: %
6591: % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
6592: % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
6593: % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
6594: % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
6595: % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
6596: % obscuring the section heading with something else.
6597: \vskip-\parskip
6598: %
6599: % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
6600: % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
6601: % and do the needful.
6602: \penalty 10001
6603: }
6604:
6605:
6606: \message{toc,}
6607: % Table of contents.
6608: \newwrite\tocfile
6609:
6610: % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
6611: % Called from @chapter, etc.
6612: %
6613: % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
6614: % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
6615: % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
6616: % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
6617: % destination to jump to.
6618: %
6619: % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
6620: % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
6621: % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
6622: % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
6623: %
6624: \newif\iftocfileopened
6625: \def\omitkeyword{omit}%
6626: %
6627: \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
6628: \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
6629: \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
6630: \iftocfileopened\else
6631: \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
6632: \global\tocfileopenedtrue
6633: \fi
6634: %
6635: \iflinks
6636: {\atdummies
6637: \edef\temp{%
6638: \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
6639: \temp
6640: }%
6641: \fi
6642: \fi
6643: %
6644: % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
6645: % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
6646: % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
6647: % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
6648: % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
6649: % `1', and two named `2'.
6650: \ifpdforxetex
6651: \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue
6652: \fi
6653: }
6654:
6655:
6656: % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
6657: % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
6658: % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
6659: %
6660: \def\activecatcodes{%
6661: \catcode`\"=\active
6662: \catcode`\$=\active
6663: \catcode`\<=\active
6664: \catcode`\>=\active
6665: \catcode`\\=\active
6666: \catcode`\^=\active
6667: \catcode`\_=\active
6668: \catcode`\|=\active
6669: \catcode`\~=\active
6670: }
6671:
6672:
6673: % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
6674: \def\readtocfile{%
6675: \setupdatafile
6676: \activecatcodes
6677: \input \tocreadfilename
6678: }
6679:
6680: % process toc file to find the maximum width of the section numbers for
6681: % each chapter
6682: \def\findsecnowidths{%
6683: \begingroup
6684: \setupdatafile
6685: \activecatcodes
6686: \secentryfonts
6687: % Redefinitions
6688: \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
6689: \def\curchapname{secnowidth-##2}%
6690: \curchapmax=0pt
6691: }%
6692: \let\appentry\numchapentry
6693: %
6694: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
6695: \def\cursecname{secnowidth-##2}%
6696: \cursecmax=0pt
6697: %
6698: \setbox0=\hbox{##2}%
6699: \ifdim\wd0>\curchapmax
6700: \curchapmax=\wd0
6701: \expandafter\xdef\csname\curchapname\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
6702: \fi
6703: }%
6704: \let\appsecentry\numsecentry
6705: %
6706: \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
6707: \def\curssecname{secnowidth-##2}%
6708: \curssecmax=0pt
6709: %
6710: \setbox0=\hbox{##2}%
6711: \ifdim\wd0>\cursecmax
6712: \cursecmax=\wd0
6713: \expandafter\xdef\csname\cursecname\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
6714: \fi
6715: }%
6716: \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry
6717: %
6718: \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
6719: \setbox0=\hbox{##2}%
6720: \ifdim\wd0>\curssecmax
6721: \curssecmax=\wd0
6722: \expandafter\xdef\csname\curssecname\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
6723: \fi
6724: }%
6725: \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry
6726: %
6727: % Discard any output by outputting to dummy vbox, in case the toc file
6728: % contains macros that we have not redefined above.
6729: \setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup
6730: \input \tocreadfilename\relax
6731: \egroup
6732: \endgroup
6733: }
6734: \newdimen\curchapmax
6735: \newdimen\cursecmax
6736: \newdimen\curssecmax
6737:
6738:
6739: % set #1 to the maximum section width for #2
6740: \def\retrievesecnowidth#1#2{%
6741: \expandafter\let\expandafter\savedsecnowidth \csname secnowidth-#2\endcsname
6742: \ifx\savedsecnowidth\relax
6743: #1=0pt
6744: \else
6745: #1=\savedsecnowidth
6746: \fi
6747: }
6748: \newdimen\secnowidthchap
6749: \secnowidthchap=0pt
6750: \newdimen\secnowidthsec
6751: \secnowidthsec=0pt
6752: \newdimen\secnowidthssec
6753: \secnowidthssec=0pt
6754:
6755:
6756: \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
6757: \newcount\savepageno
6758: \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
6759:
6760: % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
6761: %
6762: \def\startcontents#1{%
6763: % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
6764: % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.
6765: \contentsalignmacro
6766: \immediate\closeout\tocfile
6767: %
6768: % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
6769: % It is abundantly clear what they are.
6770: \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
6771: %
6772: \savepageno = \pageno
6773: \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
6774: \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
6775: \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
6776: %
6777: % Roman numerals for page numbers.
6778: \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
6779: \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings
6780: % Record where the Roman numerals started.
6781: \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi
6782: \linkentrytexttrue
6783: }
6784:
6785: % \raggedbottom in plain.tex hardcodes \topskip so override it
6786: \catcode`\@=11
6787: \def\raggedbottom{\advance\topskip by 0pt plus60pt \r@ggedbottomtrue}
6788: \catcode`\@=\other
6789:
6790: % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
6791: % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
6792: %
6793: \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
6794:
6795: % Normal (long) toc.
6796: %
6797: \def\contents{%
6798: \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
6799: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6800: \ifeof 1 \else
6801: \findsecnowidths
6802: \readtocfile
6803: \fi
6804: \vfill \eject
6805: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6806: \ifeof 1 \else
6807: \pdfmakeoutlines
6808: \fi
6809: \closein 1
6810: \endgroup
6811: \contentsendroman
6812: }
6813:
6814: % And just the chapters.
6815: \def\summarycontents{%
6816: \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
6817: %
6818: \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
6819: \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
6820: \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
6821: \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
6822: % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
6823: \secfonts
6824: \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
6825: \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
6826: \rm
6827: \hyphenpenalty = 10000
6828: \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
6829: \extrasecnoskip=0.4pt
6830: \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
6831: \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
6832: \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
6833: \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6834: \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6835: \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6836: \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6837: \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6838: \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6839: \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6840: \ifeof 1 \else
6841: \readtocfile
6842: \fi
6843: \closein 1
6844: \vfill \eject
6845: \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6846: \endgroup
6847: \contentsendroman
6848: }
6849: \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
6850:
6851: % Get ready to use Arabic numerals again
6852: \def\contentsendroman{%
6853: \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6854: \global\pageno=1
6855: \contentsendcount = \pagecount
6856: }
6857:
6858: % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
6859: % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
6860: %
6861: \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
6862: % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
6863: % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
6864: % But use \hss just in case.
6865: %
6866: % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
6867: % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
6868: % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
6869: % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
6870: % there are before deciding ...
6871: \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
6872: }
6873:
6874: % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents,
6875: % and are read in from the *.toc file.
6876: %
6877: % The arguments are like:
6878: % \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4
6879: % #1 - the chapter or section name.
6880: % #2 - section number
6881: % #3 - level of section (e.g "chap", "sec")
6882: % #4 - page number
6883:
6884: % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
6885: % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
6886: % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
6887: \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
6888: \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{%
6889: % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading.
6890: % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the
6891: % part heading, before a following chapter heading.
6892: \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
6893: \penalty-300
6894: \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
6895: \dochapentry{#1}{\numeralbox}{}%
6896: }
6897: %
6898: % Parts, in the short toc.
6899: \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
6900: \penalty-300
6901: \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
6902: \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
6903: }
6904:
6905: % Chapters, in the main contents.
6906: \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6907: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthchap{#2}%
6908: \dochapentry{#1}{#2}{#4}%
6909: }
6910:
6911: % Chapters, in the short toc.
6912: \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6913: \tocentry{#1}{\shortchaplabel{#2}}{#4}%
6914: }
6915:
6916: % Appendices, in the main contents.
6917: % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
6918: %
6919: \def\appendixbox#1{%
6920: % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
6921: \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
6922: \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
6923: %
6924: \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{%
6925: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthchap{#2}%
6926: \dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{}{#4}%
6927: }
6928:
6929: % Unnumbered chapters.
6930: \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{}{#4}}
6931: \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{}{#4}}
6932:
6933: % Sections.
6934: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}}
6935:
6936: \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
6937: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthsec{#2}%
6938: \dosecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}%
6939: }
6940: \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
6941: \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
6942: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthsec{#2}%
6943: \dosecentry{#1}{}{#4}%
6944: }
6945:
6946: % Subsections.
6947: \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
6948: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthssec{#2}%
6949: \dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}%
6950: }
6951: \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
6952: \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{%
6953: \retrievesecnowidth\secnowidthssec{#2}%
6954: \dosubsecentry{#1}{}{#4}%
6955: }
6956:
6957: % And subsubsections.
6958: \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}{#4}}
6959: \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
6960: \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{}{#4}}
6961:
6962: % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
6963: % Same as \defaultparindent.
6964: \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
6965:
6966: % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text, #2 is
6967: % a section number if present, and #3 is the page number.
6968: %
6969: % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
6970: % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
6971: \def\dochapentry#1#2#3{%
6972: \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
6973: \begingroup
6974: % Move the page numbers slightly to the right
6975: \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em
6976: \chapentryfonts
6977: \extrasecnoskip=0.4em % separate chapter number more
6978: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6979: \endgroup
6980: \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
6981: }
6982:
6983: \def\dosecentry#1#2#3{\begingroup
6984: \secnowidth=\secnowidthchap
6985: \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
6986: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6987: \endgroup}
6988:
6989: \def\dosubsecentry#1#2#3{\begingroup
6990: \secnowidth=\secnowidthsec
6991: \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
6992: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6993: \endgroup}
6994:
6995: \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2#3{\begingroup
6996: \secnowidth=\secnowidthssec
6997: \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
6998: \tocentry{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6999: \endgroup}
7000:
7001: % Used for the maximum width of a section number so we can align
7002: % section titles.
7003: \newdimen\secnowidth
7004: \secnowidth=0pt
7005: \newdimen\extrasecnoskip
7006: \extrasecnoskip=0pt
7007:
7008: % \tocentry{TITLE}{SEC NO}{PAGE}
7009: %
7010: \def\tocentry#1#2#3{%
7011: \def\secno{#2}%
7012: \ifx\empty\secno
7013: \entry{#1}{#3}%
7014: \else
7015: \ifdim 0pt=\secnowidth
7016: \setbox0=\hbox{#2\hskip\labelspace\hskip\extrasecnoskip}%
7017: \else
7018: \advance\secnowidth by \labelspace
7019: \advance\secnowidth by \extrasecnoskip
7020: \setbox0=\hbox to \secnowidth{%
7021: #2\hskip\labelspace\hskip\extrasecnoskip\hfill}%
7022: \fi
7023: \entrycontskip=\wd0
7024: \entry{\box0 #1}{#3}%
7025: \fi
7026: }
7027: \newdimen\labelspace
7028: \labelspace=0.6em
7029:
7030: \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
7031: \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
7032: \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
7033: \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
7034:
7035:
7036: \message{environments,}
7037: % @foo ... @end foo.
7038:
7039: % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
7040: % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
7041: % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
7042:
7043: \envdef\tex{%
7044: \setregularquotes
7045: \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
7046: \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
7047: \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
7048: \catcode `\%=14
7049: \catcode `\+=\other
7050: \catcode `\"=\other
7051: \catcode `\|=\other
7052: \catcode `\<=\other
7053: \catcode `\>=\other
7054: \catcode `\`=\other
7055: \catcode `\'=\other
7056: %
7057: % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
7058: % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
7059: \mathactive
7060: %
7061: % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
7062: \let\b=\ptexb
7063: \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
7064: \let\c=\ptexc
7065: \let\,=\ptexcomma
7066: \let\.=\ptexdot
7067: \let\dots=\ptexdots
7068: \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
7069: \let\!=\ptexexclam
7070: \let\i=\ptexi
7071: \let\indent=\ptexindent
7072: \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
7073: \let\{=\ptexlbrace
7074: \let\+=\tabalign
7075: \let\}=\ptexrbrace
7076: \let\/=\ptexslash
7077: \let\sp=\ptexsp
7078: \let\*=\ptexstar
7079: %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
7080: \let\t=\ptext
7081: \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer
7082: \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
7083: %
7084: \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
7085: \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
7086: \def\@{@}%
7087: }
7088: % There is no need to define \Etex.
7089:
7090: % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
7091: % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
7092: % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
7093:
7094: % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
7095: \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
7096:
7097: % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
7098: % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
7099: % have any width.
7100: \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
7101:
7102: % This space is always present above and below environments.
7103: \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
7104:
7105: % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
7106: % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
7107: % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
7108: % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
7109: %
7110: \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
7111: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
7112: % \sectionheading, q.v.
7113: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
7114: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
7115: \endgraf
7116: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
7117: \removelastskip
7118: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
7119: % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
7120: % often leads into it.
7121: \penalty100
7122: \fi
7123: \vskip\envskipamount
7124: \fi
7125: \fi
7126: }}
7127:
7128: \def\afterenvbreak{{%
7129: % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
7130: % \sectionheading, q.v.
7131: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
7132: \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
7133: \endgraf
7134: \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
7135: \removelastskip
7136: % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
7137: % or better ...
7138: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
7139: \vskip\envskipamount
7140: \fi
7141: \fi
7142: }}
7143:
7144: % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
7145: % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
7146: \let\nonarrowing=\relax
7147:
7148: % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
7149: % environment contents.
7150:
7151: %
7152: \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
7153: \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
7154: \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
7155: \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
7156: \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
7157: \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
7158: \hskip\rskip}}
7159: \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
7160: \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
7161: \hskip\rskip}}
7162: %
7163: \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
7164:
7165: % only require the font if @cartouche is actually used
7166: \def\cartouchefontdefs{%
7167: \font\circle=lcircle10\relax
7168: \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
7169: }
7170: \newdimen\circthick
7171: \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
7172: \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
7173:
7174: \envparseargdef\cartouche{%
7175: \cartouchefontdefs
7176: \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
7177: \startsavinginserts
7178: \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
7179: \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
7180: %
7181: % Set paragraph width for text inside cartouche. There are
7182: % left and right margins of 3pt each plus two vrules 0.4pt each.
7183: \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
7184: \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
7185: \advance\cartinner by -6.8pt
7186: %
7187: % For drawing top and bottom of cartouche. Each corner char
7188: % adds 6pt and we take off the width of a rule to line up with the
7189: % right boundary perfectly.
7190: \cartouter=\hsize
7191: \advance\cartouter by 11.6pt
7192: %
7193: \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
7194: %
7195: % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
7196: % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
7197: % collide with the section heading.
7198: \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
7199: %
7200: \setbox\groupbox=\vtop\bgroup
7201: \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
7202: \carttop
7203: \hbox\bgroup
7204: \hskip\lskip
7205: \vrule\kern3pt
7206: \vbox\bgroup
7207: \hsize=\cartinner
7208: \baselineskip=\normbskip
7209: \lineskip=\normlskip
7210: \parskip=\normpskip
7211: \def\arg{#1}%
7212: \ifx\arg\empty\else
7213: \centerV{\hfil \bf #1 \hfil}%
7214: \fi
7215: \kern3pt
7216: \vskip -\parskip
7217: }
7218: \def\Ecartouche{%
7219: \ifhmode\par\fi
7220: \kern3pt
7221: \egroup
7222: \kern3pt\vrule
7223: \hskip\rskip
7224: \egroup
7225: \cartbot
7226: \egroup
7227: \addgroupbox
7228: \checkinserts
7229: }
7230:
7231:
7232: % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
7233: % inside a group.
7234: \newdimen\nonfillparindent
7235: \def\nonfillstart{%
7236: \aboveenvbreak
7237: \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
7238: \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
7239: \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
7240: \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
7241: \parskip = 0pt
7242: % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
7243: % the normal \indent.
7244: \nonfillparindent=\parindent
7245: \parindent = 0pt
7246: \let\indent\nonfillindent
7247: %
7248: \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
7249: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
7250: \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
7251: \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
7252: \else
7253: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
7254: \fi
7255: \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
7256: }
7257:
7258: \begingroup
7259: \obeyspaces
7260: % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
7261: % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
7262: % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
7263: % @indent.
7264: \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
7265: \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
7266: \ifx\temp %
7267: \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
7268: \else%
7269: \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
7270: \fi%
7271: }%
7272: \endgroup
7273: \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
7274: \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
7275:
7276: % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
7277: % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
7278: % This affects the following displayed environments:
7279: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp, @verbatim
7280: %
7281: \def\smallword{small}
7282: \def\nosmallword{nosmall}
7283: \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
7284: \def\setnormaldispenv{%
7285: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
7286: % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
7287: % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
7288: % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
7289: % to change the fonts afterward.
7290: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
7291: \smallexamplefonts \rm
7292: \fi
7293: }
7294: \def\setsmalldispenv{%
7295: \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
7296: \else
7297: \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
7298: \smallexamplefonts \rm
7299: \fi
7300: }
7301:
7302: % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
7303: % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
7304: \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
7305: \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
7306: \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
7307: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
7308: \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
7309: }
7310:
7311: % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
7312: \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
7313: \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
7314: \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
7315: }
7316: %
7317: % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
7318: % @example: same as @lisp.
7319: %
7320: % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
7321: % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
7322: %
7323: \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
7324: \nonfillstart
7325: \tt\setcodequotes
7326: \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
7327: \parsearg\gobble
7328: }
7329: % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
7330: %
7331: \makedispenvdef{display}{%
7332: \nonfillstart
7333: \gobble
7334: }
7335:
7336: % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
7337: %
7338: \makedispenvdef{format}{%
7339: \let\nonarrowing = t%
7340: \nonfillstart
7341: \gobble
7342: }
7343:
7344: % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
7345: \envdef\flushleft{%
7346: \let\nonarrowing = t%
7347: \nonfillstart
7348: \gobble
7349: }
7350: \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
7351:
7352: % @flushright.
7353: %
7354: \envdef\flushright{%
7355: \let\nonarrowing = t%
7356: \nonfillstart
7357: \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
7358: \gobble
7359: }
7360: \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
7361:
7362:
7363: % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
7364: % justification. From plain.tex.
7365: \envdef\raggedright{%
7366: \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
7367: }
7368: \let\Eraggedright\par
7369:
7370:
7371: % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
7372: % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
7373: % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
7374: % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
7375: %
7376: \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
7377: %
7378: \def\quotationstart{%
7379: \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
7380: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
7381: \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
7382: \fi
7383: \parsearg\quotationlabel
7384: }
7385:
7386: % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
7387: % doing normal filling.
7388: %
7389: \def\Equotation{%
7390: \par
7391: \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
7392: % indent a bit.
7393: \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
7394: \fi
7395: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
7396: }
7397: \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
7398:
7399: % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
7400: \def\quotationlabel#1{%
7401: \def\temp{#1}%
7402: \ifx\temp\empty \else
7403: {\bf #1: }%
7404: \fi
7405: }
7406:
7407: % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
7408: % has no optional argument.
7409: %
7410: \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
7411: %
7412: \def\indentedblockstart{%
7413: {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
7414: \parindent=0pt
7415: %
7416: % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
7417: \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
7418: \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
7419: \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
7420: \else
7421: \let\nonarrowing = \relax
7422: \fi
7423: }
7424:
7425: % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
7426: %
7427: \def\Eindentedblock{%
7428: \par
7429: {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
7430: }
7431: \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
7432:
7433:
7434: % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
7435: % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
7436: % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
7437: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
7438: %
7439: % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
7440: %
7441: % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
7442: % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
7443: % verbatim line.
7444: \def\dospecials{%
7445: \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
7446: \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
7447: \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
7448: % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
7449: % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
7450: % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
7451: %\do\`\do\'%
7452: }
7453: %
7454: % [Knuth] p. 380
7455: \def\uncatcodespecials{%
7456: \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
7457: %
7458: % Setup for the @verb command.
7459: %
7460: % Eight spaces for a tab
7461: \begingroup
7462: \catcode`\^^I=\active
7463: \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
7464: \endgroup
7465: %
7466: \def\setupverb{%
7467: \tt
7468: \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
7469: \parindent = 0pt
7470: \setcodequotes
7471: \tabeightspaces
7472: % Respect line breaks,
7473: % print special symbols as themselves, and
7474: % make each space count
7475: % must do in this order:
7476: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
7477: }
7478:
7479: % Setup for the @verbatim environment
7480: %
7481: % Real tab expansion.
7482: \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
7483: %
7484: % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
7485: % tabs.
7486: \newbox\verbbox
7487: \def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
7488: %
7489: \begingroup
7490: \catcode`\^^I=\active
7491: \gdef\tabexpand{%
7492: \catcode`\^^I=\active
7493: \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
7494: \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
7495: \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
7496: \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
7497: \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
7498: \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox
7499: \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox
7500: }%
7501: }
7502: \endgroup
7503:
7504: % start the verbatim environment.
7505: \def\setupverbatim{%
7506: \let\nonarrowing = t%
7507: \nonfillstart
7508: \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
7509: \def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}%
7510: \tabexpand
7511: \setcodequotes
7512: % Respect line breaks,
7513: % print special symbols as themselves, and
7514: % make each space count.
7515: % Must do in this order:
7516: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
7517: }
7518:
7519: % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
7520: % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
7521: % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
7522: %
7523: % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
7524: %
7525: % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
7526: \begingroup
7527: \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
7528: \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
7529: \endgroup
7530: %
7531: \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
7532: %
7533: %
7534: % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
7535: % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
7536: %
7537: % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
7538: %
7539: % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
7540: % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
7541: % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
7542: %
7543: % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
7544: %
7545: \begingroup
7546: \catcode`\ =\active
7547: \obeylines %
7548: % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
7549: % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
7550: % line in the output.
7551: \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{%
7552: \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
7553: % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
7554: % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
7555: % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in
7556: % the block.
7557: \endgroup
7558: %
7559: \envdef\verbatim{%
7560: \setnormaldispenv\setupverbatim\doverbatim
7561: }
7562: \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
7563:
7564:
7565: % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
7566: %
7567: \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
7568: %
7569: \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
7570: {%
7571: \makevalueexpandable
7572: \setupverbatim
7573: {%
7574: \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
7575: \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
7576: \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 }
7577: \expandafter
7578: }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup
7579: \afterenvbreak
7580: }%
7581: }
7582:
7583: % @copying ... @end copying.
7584: % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
7585: %
7586: % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
7587: % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
7588: % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
7589: % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
7590: % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
7591: % possible is desirable.
7592: %
7593: \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\macrobodyctxt\docopying}
7594: {\catcode`\ =\other
7595: \gdef\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
7596: }
7597:
7598: \def\insertcopying{%
7599: \begingroup
7600: \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
7601: \scanexp\copyingtext
7602: \endgroup
7603: }
7604:
7605:
7606: \message{defuns,}
7607: % @defun etc.
7608:
7609: \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
7610: \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
7611: \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
7612: \newcount\defunpenalty
7613:
7614: % Start the processing of @deffn:
7615: \def\startdefun{%
7616: \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
7617: \medbreak
7618: \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
7619: % following @def command, see below.
7620: \else
7621: % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
7622: % which is there to keep the function description together with its
7623: % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
7624: % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
7625: % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
7626: % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
7627: % a break between a section heading and a defun.
7628: %
7629: % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
7630: % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
7631: % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
7632: % @def command.
7633: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
7634: %
7635: % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
7636: % But do insert the glue.
7637: \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
7638: \fi
7639: %
7640: \parindent=0in
7641: \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
7642: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
7643: }
7644:
7645: % Called as \printdefunline \deffooheader{text}
7646: %
7647: \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
7648: \begingroup
7649: \plainfrenchspacing
7650: % call \deffooheader:
7651: #1#2 \endheader
7652: % common ending:
7653: \interlinepenalty = 10000
7654: \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
7655: \endgraf
7656: \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
7657: \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \deffoox
7658: % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
7659: % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
7660: \checkparencounts
7661: \endgroup
7662: }
7663:
7664: \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
7665:
7666: % @defblock, @defline do not automatically create index entries
7667: \envdef\defblock{%
7668: \startdefun
7669: }
7670: \let\Edefblock\Edefun
7671:
7672: \def\defline{%
7673: \doingtypefnfalse
7674: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline\deflineheader}%
7675: }
7676: \def\deflineheader#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
7677: \printdefname{#1}{}{#2}\magicamp\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
7678: }
7679:
7680: \def\deftypeline{%
7681: \doingtypefntrue
7682: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline\deftypelineheader}%
7683: }
7684: \def\deftypelineheader#1 #2 #3 #4\endheader{%
7685: \printdefname{#1}{#2}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
7686: }
7687:
7688: % \makedefun{deffoo} (\deffooheader parameters) { (\deffooheader expansion) }
7689: %
7690: % Define \deffoo, \deffoox \Edeffoo and \deffooheader.
7691: \def\makedefun#1{%
7692: \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
7693: \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
7694: \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
7695: \temp
7696: }
7697: \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
7698: \envdef#1{%
7699: \startdefun
7700: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
7701: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
7702: }%
7703: \def#2{%
7704: % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
7705: \checkenv#1%
7706: %
7707: % As in \startdefun, allow line break if we have multiple x headers
7708: % in a row. It's not a great place, though.
7709: \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
7710: %
7711: \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
7712: \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
7713: }%
7714: \def#3% definition of \deffooheader follows
7715: }
7716:
7717: \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
7718: \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
7719:
7720: % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
7721: % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
7722: % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
7723: %
7724: \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
7725: \def\temp{#1}%
7726: \ifx\temp\onword
7727: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
7728: = \empty
7729: \else\ifx\temp\offword
7730: \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
7731: = \relax
7732: \else
7733: \errhelp = \EMsimple
7734: \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
7735: must be on|off}%
7736: \fi\fi
7737: }
7738:
7739: % Untyped functions:
7740:
7741: % @deffn category name args
7742: \makedefun{deffn}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
7743: \doind{fn}{\code{#2}}%
7744: \printdefname{#1}{}{#2}\magicamp\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
7745: }
7746:
7747: % @defop category class name args
7748: \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopheaderx{#1\ \putwordon}}
7749: \def\defopheaderx#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
7750: \doind{fn}{\code{#3}\space\putwordon\ \code{#2}}%
7751: \printdefname{#1\ \code{#2}}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
7752: }
7753:
7754: % Typed functions:
7755:
7756: % @deftypefn category type name args
7757: \makedefun{deftypefn}#1 #2 #3 #4\endheader{%
7758: \doind{fn}{\code{#3}}%
7759: \doingtypefntrue
7760: \printdefname{#1}{#2}{#3}\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
7761: }
7762:
7763: % @deftypeop category class type name args
7764: \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopheaderx{#1\ \putwordon}}
7765: \def\deftypeopheaderx#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
7766: \doind{fn}{\code{#4}\space\putwordon\ \code{#1\ \code{#2}}}%
7767: \doingtypefntrue
7768: \printdefname{#1\ \code{#2}}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
7769: }
7770:
7771: % Typed variables:
7772:
7773: % @deftypevr category type var args
7774: \makedefun{deftypevr}#1 #2 #3 #4\endheader{%
7775: \doind{vr}{\code{#3}}%
7776: \printdefname{#1}{#2}{#3}\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
7777: }
7778:
7779: % @deftypecv category class type var args
7780: \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvheaderx{#1\ \putwordof}}
7781: \def\deftypecvheaderx#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
7782: \doind{vr}{\code{#4}\space\putwordof\ \code{#2}}%
7783: \printdefname{#1\ \code{#2}}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
7784: }
7785:
7786: % Untyped variables:
7787:
7788: % @defvr category var args
7789: \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
7790:
7791: % @defcv category class var args
7792: \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvheaderx{#1\ \putwordof}}
7793: \def\defcvheaderx#1#2 {\deftypecvheaderx{#1}#2 {} }
7794:
7795: % Types:
7796:
7797: % @deftp category name args
7798: \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
7799: \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
7800: \printdefname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
7801: }
7802:
7803: % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
7804: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
7805: \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
7806: \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
7807: \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
7808: \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
7809: \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
7810: \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
7811: \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopheaderx\putwordMethodon}
7812: \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopheaderx\putwordMethodon}
7813: \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvheaderx\putwordInstanceVariableof}
7814: \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvheaderx\putwordInstanceVariableof}
7815:
7816: % \printdefname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
7817: % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
7818: % #2 is the return type, if any.
7819: % #3 is the function name.
7820: %
7821: % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
7822: %
7823: \def\printdefname#1#2#3{%
7824: \par
7825: % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
7826: \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
7827: %
7828: % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
7829: % on a line by itself.
7830: \rettypeownlinefalse
7831: \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
7832: % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
7833: \ifflagclear{txideftypefnnl}{}{\rettypeownlinetrue}%
7834: \fi
7835: %
7836: % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
7837: % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
7838: % just below it.
7839: \def\temp{#1}%
7840: \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
7841: %
7842: % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
7843: % least two.
7844: \tempnum = 2
7845: %
7846: % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
7847: % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
7848: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
7849: %
7850: % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
7851: \ifrettypeownline
7852: \advance\tempnum by 1
7853: \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
7854: \else
7855: \def\maybeshapeline{}%
7856: \fi
7857: %
7858: % The continuations:
7859: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
7860: %
7861: % The final paragraph shape:
7862: \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
7863: %
7864: % Put the category name at the right margin.
7865: \noindent
7866: \hbox to 0pt{%
7867: \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
7868: % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
7869: \kern\leftskip
7870: % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
7871: }%
7872: %
7873: % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
7874: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
7875: \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
7876: {%
7877: \def\^^M{}% for line continuation
7878: %
7879: % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
7880: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
7881: % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
7882: % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
7883: % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
7884: % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
7885: % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
7886: % one has made identifiers using them :).
7887: \df \tt
7888: \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
7889: \ifx\temp\empty\else
7890: \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
7891: \ifrettypeownline
7892: % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
7893: \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
7894: \else
7895: \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
7896: \fi
7897: \fi % no return type
7898: #3% output function name
7899: }%
7900: \ifflagclear{txidefnamenospace}{%
7901: {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont
7902: }{}%
7903: %
7904: \boldbrax
7905: % arguments will be output next, if any.
7906: }
7907:
7908: % Print arguments. Use slanted for @def*, typewriter for @deftype*.
7909: \def\defunargs#1{%
7910: \bgroup
7911: \def\^^M{}% for line continuation
7912: \df \ifdoingtypefn \tt \else \sl \fi
7913: \ifflagclear{txicodevaristt}{}%
7914: {\def\var##1{{\setregularquotes \ttsl ##1}}}%
7915: #1%
7916: \egroup
7917: }
7918:
7919: % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
7920: %
7921: \def\activeparens{%
7922: \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
7923: \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
7924: \catcode`\&=\active
7925: }
7926:
7927: % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
7928: \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
7929:
7930: % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
7931: % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
7932: % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
7933: {
7934: \activeparens
7935: \gdef\defcharsdefault{%
7936: \let(=\lparen \let)=\rparen
7937: \let[=\lbrack \let]=\rbrack
7938: \let& = \&%
7939: }
7940: \globaldefs=1 \defcharsdefault
7941:
7942: \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
7943: \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
7944: }
7945: \let\ampchar\&
7946:
7947: \newcount\parencount
7948:
7949: % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
7950: \newif\ifampseen
7951: \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\rm\ }}
7952:
7953: \def\parenfont{%
7954: \ifampseen
7955: % At the first level, print parens in roman,
7956: % otherwise use the default font.
7957: \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
7958: \else
7959: % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
7960: % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
7961: \sf
7962: \fi
7963: }
7964: \def\infirstlevel#1{%
7965: \ifampseen
7966: \ifnum\parencount=1
7967: #1%
7968: \fi
7969: \fi
7970: }
7971: \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
7972:
7973: \def\opnr{%
7974: \global\advance\parencount by 1
7975: {\parenfont(}%
7976: \infirstlevel \bfafterword
7977: }
7978: \def\clnr{%
7979: {\parenfont)}%
7980: \infirstlevel \sl
7981: \global\advance\parencount by -1
7982: }
7983:
7984: \newcount\brackcount
7985: \def\lbrb{%
7986: \global\advance\brackcount by 1
7987: {\bf[}%
7988: }
7989: \def\rbrb{%
7990: {\bf]}%
7991: \global\advance\brackcount by -1
7992: }
7993:
7994: \def\checkparencounts{%
7995: \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
7996: \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
7997: }
7998: % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
7999: % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
8000: \def\badparencount{%
8001: \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
8002: \global\parencount=0
8003: }
8004: \def\badbrackcount{%
8005: \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
8006: \global\brackcount=0
8007: }
8008:
8009:
8010: \message{macros,}
8011: % @macro.
8012:
8013: % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
8014: % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
8015: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
8016: \newwrite\macscribble
8017: \def\scantokens#1{%
8018: \toks0={#1}%
8019: \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
8020: \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
8021: \immediate\closeout\macscribble
8022: \input \jobname.tmp
8023: }
8024: \fi
8025:
8026: \let\E=\expandafter
8027:
8028: % Used at the time of macro expansion.
8029: % Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
8030: \def\scanmacro#1{%
8031: \newlinechar`\^^M
8032: % expand the expansion of \eatleadingcr twice to maybe remove a leading
8033: % newline (and \else and \fi tokens), then call \eatspaces on the result.
8034: \def\xeatspaces##1{%
8035: \E\E\E\E\E\E\E\eatspaces\E\E\E\E\E\E\E{\eatleadingcr##1%
8036: }}%
8037: \def\xempty##1{}%
8038: %
8039: % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
8040: \scantokens{#1@comment}%
8041: %
8042: % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
8043: % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla
8044: % in math mode.
8045: }
8046:
8047: % Used for copying and captions
8048: \def\scanexp#1{%
8049: \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}%
8050: }
8051:
8052: \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
8053: \newtoks\macname % Macro name
8054: \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
8055:
8056: % List of all defined macros in the form
8057: % \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2...
8058: % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
8059: % if there is a need.
8060: \def\macrolist{}
8061:
8062: % Add the macro to \macrolist
8063: \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
8064: \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
8065: \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}%
8066: \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
8067: }
8068:
8069: % Utility routines.
8070: % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
8071: % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
8072: % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
8073: %
8074: \def\cslet#1#2{%
8075: \expandafter\let
8076: \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
8077: \csname#2\endcsname
8078: }
8079:
8080: % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
8081: % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
8082: {\catcode`\@=11
8083: \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
8084: \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
8085: \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
8086: \def\unbrace#1{#1}
8087: \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
8088: }
8089:
8090: {\catcode`\^^M=\other%
8091: \gdef\eatleadingcr#1{\if\noexpand#1\noexpand^^M\else\E#1\fi}}%
8092: % Warning: this won't work for a delimited argument
8093: % or for an empty argument
8094:
8095: % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
8096: {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
8097: \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
8098: \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
8099: \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
8100: }
8101:
8102: % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
8103: % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
8104: % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
8105: % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
8106: %
8107: % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
8108: % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
8109: % confine the change to the current group.
8110: %
8111: % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
8112: % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
8113: % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
8114: %
8115: \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
8116: \catcode`\"=\other
8117: \catcode`\+=\other
8118: \catcode`\<=\other
8119: \catcode`\>=\other
8120: \catcode`\^=\other
8121: \catcode`\_=\other
8122: \catcode`\|=\other
8123: \catcode`\~=\other
8124: \catcode`\@=\other
8125: \catcode`\^^M=\other
8126: \catcode`\\=\active
8127: \passthroughcharstrue
8128: }
8129:
8130: \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions and @copying
8131: \scanctxt
8132: \catcode`\ =\other
8133: \catcode`\{=\other
8134: \catcode`\}=\other
8135: }
8136:
8137: % Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode
8138: % changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
8139: % an argument to another Texinfo command.
8140: \def\macroargctxt{%
8141: \scanctxt
8142: \catcode`\ =\active
8143: }
8144:
8145: \def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
8146: \scanctxt
8147: \catcode`\{=\other
8148: \catcode`\}=\other
8149: }
8150:
8151: % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
8152: % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
8153: % where N is the macro parameter number.
8154: % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
8155: % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
8156: %
8157: {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
8158: @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
8159: @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
8160: }
8161: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
8162:
8163: \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
8164:
8165: \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
8166: \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
8167:
8168: \def\macroxxx#1{%
8169: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
8170: \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
8171: \paramno=0\relax
8172: \else
8173: \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
8174: \if\paramno>256\relax
8175: \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
8176: \errhelp = \EMsimple
8177: \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
8178: \fi
8179: \fi
8180: \fi
8181: \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
8182: \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
8183: \else
8184: \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
8185: \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
8186: \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
8187: \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
8188: \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
8189: \fi
8190: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \usembodybackslash
8191: \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
8192: \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
8193: \fi}
8194:
8195: \parseargdef\unmacro{%
8196: \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
8197: \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
8198: \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
8199: % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
8200: \begingroup
8201: \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
8202: \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo
8203: \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
8204: \endgroup
8205: \fi
8206: }
8207:
8208: % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
8209: % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
8210: %
8211: \def\unmacrodo#1{%
8212: \ifx #1\relax
8213: % remove this
8214: \else
8215: \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1%
8216: \fi
8217: }
8218:
8219: % \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to
8220: % the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
8221: \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
8222: \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
8223: \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
8224: \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
8225: % This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
8226: % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
8227: % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
8228:
8229: % Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
8230: % Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
8231: % and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
8232: % three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
8233: % list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are
8234: % less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
8235: % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
8236: % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
8237: %
8238: % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
8239: %
8240: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
8241: % \parsemmanyargdef.
8242: %
8243: \def\parsemargdef#1;{%
8244: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
8245: \let\hash\relax
8246: % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
8247: \let\xeatspaces\relax
8248: \let\xempty\relax
8249: \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
8250: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
8251: \paramno0\relax
8252: \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
8253: \fi
8254: }
8255: \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
8256: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
8257: \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
8258: \advance\paramno by 1
8259: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
8260: {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno\noexpand\xempty{}}}%
8261: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
8262: \fi\next}
8263: % the \xempty{} is to give \eatleadingcr an argument in the case of an
8264: % empty macro argument.
8265:
8266: % \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
8267: %
8268: % Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
8269: % rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
8270: %
8271: % We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashes in the macro
8272: % body to be transformed.
8273: % Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \macrodef.
8274: %
8275: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{%
8276: \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\macrodef}}%
8277: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{%
8278: \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\macrodef}}%
8279:
8280: % Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
8281: \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
8282: \catcode `@=11\relax
8283:
8284: %%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8285:
8286: % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
8287: % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
8288: % processed again to replace the arguments.
8289: %
8290: % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
8291: % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
8292: % the catcode regime under which the body was input).
8293: %
8294: % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
8295: % arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
8296: %
8297: % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
8298: % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
8299: % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
8300: % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
8301: % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
8302: % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
8303: \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
8304: \if#1;\let\next=\relax
8305: \else
8306: \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
8307: \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
8308: \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
8309: \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
8310: % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
8311: % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
8312: % \xdef .
8313: \expandafter\edef\tempa
8314: {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
8315: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
8316: \fi\next}
8317:
8318:
8319: \let\endargs@\relax
8320: \let\nil@\relax
8321: \def\nilm@{\nil@}%
8322: \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
8323:
8324: % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
8325: % definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
8326: % macarg.ARGNAME
8327: %
8328: % #1 is the macro name
8329: % #2 is the list of argument names
8330: % #3 is the list of argument values
8331: \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
8332: \def\macargdeflist@{}%
8333: \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
8334: \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
8335: \def\macroname{#1}%
8336: \begingroup
8337: \macroargctxt
8338: \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
8339: \def\@tempa{#3}%
8340: \ifx\@tempa\empty
8341: \setemptyargvalues@
8342: \else
8343: \getargvals@@
8344: \fi
8345: }
8346: \def\getargvals@@{%
8347: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
8348: % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
8349: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
8350: \else
8351: \errhelp = \EMsimple
8352: \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
8353: \fi
8354: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
8355: \else
8356: \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
8357: % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
8358: % macros to empty.
8359: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
8360: \else
8361: % pop current arg name into \@tempb
8362: \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
8363: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
8364: % pop current argument value into \@tempc
8365: \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
8366: \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
8367: % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
8368: % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
8369: \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
8370: \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
8371: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
8372: \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
8373: \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
8374: \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
8375: \let\next\getargvals@@
8376: \fi
8377: \fi
8378: \next
8379: }
8380:
8381: \def\push@#1#2{%
8382: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
8383: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
8384: \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
8385: \expandafter#1#2}%
8386: }
8387:
8388: % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
8389: % in macro \@tempa.
8390: %
8391: \def\macvalstoargs@{%
8392: % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
8393: % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
8394: % values into respective token registers.
8395: %
8396: % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
8397: \begingroup
8398: \paramno0\relax
8399: % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
8400: % value into a new token list register \toks#N
8401: \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
8402: % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
8403: % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
8404: % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
8405: \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
8406: % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
8407: % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
8408: % group.
8409: \expandafter
8410: \endgroup
8411: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
8412: }
8413:
8414: % Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
8415: %
8416: \def\macargexpandinbody@{%
8417: \expandafter
8418: \endgroup
8419: \macargdeflist@
8420: % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
8421: % is in \@tempa .
8422: \macvalstoargs@
8423: % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
8424: % with \@tempb .
8425: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
8426: % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
8427: % \egroup .
8428: \ifx\@tempb\gobble
8429: \let\@tempc\relax
8430: \else
8431: \let\@tempc\egroup
8432: \fi
8433: % And now we do the real job:
8434: \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
8435: \@tempd
8436: }
8437:
8438: \def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
8439: \if#1;\let\next\relax
8440: \else
8441: \let\next\putargsintokens@
8442: % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
8443: % alias \@tempb .
8444: \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
8445: % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
8446: \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
8447: \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
8448: \advance\paramno by 1\relax
8449: \fi
8450: \next
8451: }
8452:
8453: % Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
8454: %
8455: \def\setemptyargvalues@{%
8456: \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
8457: \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
8458: \else
8459: \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
8460: \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
8461: \fi
8462: \next
8463: }
8464:
8465: \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
8466: \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
8467: \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
8468: \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
8469: \def\paramlist{#2}%
8470: }
8471:
8472: % #1 is the element target macro
8473: % #2 is the list macro
8474: % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
8475: \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
8476: \def#1{#3}%
8477: \def#2{#4}%
8478: }
8479: \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
8480: \long\def#1{#3}%
8481: \long\def#2{#4}%
8482: }
8483:
8484:
8485: %%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8486:
8487:
8488: % This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
8489: % \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
8490: % its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}".
8491: % \paramno is the number of parameters
8492: % \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
8493: % There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
8494: % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
8495: % they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
8496: %
8497: \def\macrodef{%
8498: \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
8499: \ifnum\paramno=1
8500: \long\def\xeatspaces##1{##1}%
8501: % We don't use \xeatspaces for single-argument macros, because we
8502: % want to keep ends of lines. This definition removes \xeatspaces
8503: % when \macrobody is expanded below.
8504: \else
8505: \def\xeatspaces{\string\xeatspaces}%
8506: % This expands \xeatspaces as a sequence of character tokens, which
8507: % stops \scantokens inserting an extra space after the control sequence.
8508: \fi
8509: \ifcase\paramno
8510: % 0
8511: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8512: \begingroup
8513: \noexpand\spaceisspace
8514: \noexpand\endlineisspace
8515: \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name.
8516: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
8517: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{%
8518: \endgroup
8519: \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8520: \or % 1
8521: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8522: \begingroup
8523: \noexpand\braceorline
8524: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
8525: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
8526: \endgroup
8527: \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
8528: }%
8529: \else % at most 9
8530: \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
8531: % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
8532: % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a
8533: % comma.
8534: % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
8535: % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
8536: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8537: \begingroup
8538: \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
8539: \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
8540: \noexpand\expandafter
8541: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
8542: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
8543: \noexpand\passargtomacro
8544: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
8545: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
8546: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
8547: \expandafter\expandafter
8548: \expandafter\xdef
8549: \expandafter\expandafter
8550: \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
8551: \endgroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8552: \else % 10 or more:
8553: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8554: \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
8555: }%
8556: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
8557: \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
8558: \fi
8559: \fi}
8560:
8561: \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
8562:
8563: \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
8564:
8565:
8566: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8567: %
8568: {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
8569: @catcode`@_=11 % private names
8570: @catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator
8571:
8572: % \passargtomacro#1#2 -
8573: % Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
8574: % compressed to one.
8575: %
8576: % This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use
8577: % \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where
8578: % complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to
8579: % an auxiliary file for an index entry).
8580: %
8581: % State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
8582: % @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
8583: %
8584: % THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input)
8585: %
8586: % where:
8587: % THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
8588: % ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
8589: % PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
8590: % NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
8591:
8592: @gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{%
8593: @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\%
8594: }
8595: @gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax
8596:
8597: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
8598: % #2 - PENDING_BS
8599: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
8600: % #4 used to look ahead
8601: %
8602: % If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument;
8603: % otherwise, remove the next token.
8604: @gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{%
8605: @ifx#4\%
8606: @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish
8607: @else
8608: @expandafter@add_segment
8609: @fi#1!{#2}#4#4%
8610: }
8611:
8612: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
8613: % #2 - PENDING_BS
8614: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
8615: % #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
8616: % #5 looks ahead
8617: %
8618: % Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
8619: @gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{%
8620: @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5%
8621: }
8622:
8623: @gdef@is_fi{@fi}
8624:
8625: % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
8626: % #2 - PENDING_BS
8627: % #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
8628: % #4 is input stream until next backslash
8629: %
8630: % Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a
8631: % backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.
8632: % NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish,
8633: % finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
8634: % the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
8635: % a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
8636: % added to ARG_RESULT.
8637: @gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{%
8638: @ifx#3@_finish
8639: @call_the_macro#1!%
8640: @else
8641: % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
8642: @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi
8643: % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
8644: % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how
8645: % long #4 is.
8646: }
8647:
8648: % #1 - THE_MACRO
8649: % #2 - ARG_RESULT
8650: % #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the
8651: % conditional.
8652: @gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}}
8653:
8654: }
8655: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8656:
8657: % \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks
8658: % whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context
8659: % for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then,
8660: % to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
8661: % \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
8662: %
8663: \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
8664: \def\braceorlinexxx{%
8665: \ifx\nchar\bgroup
8666: \macroargctxt
8667: \expandafter\passargtomacro
8668: \else
8669: \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
8670: \fi \macnamexxx}
8671:
8672:
8673: % @linemacro
8674:
8675: \parseargdef\linemacro{%
8676: \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
8677: \ifx\argl\empty
8678: \paramno=0
8679: \let\hash\relax
8680: \def\paramlist{\hash 1\endlinemacro}%
8681: \else
8682: \expandafter\linegetparamlist\argl;%
8683: \fi
8684: \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \usembodybackslash
8685: \parselinemacrobody
8686: }
8687:
8688: % Build up \paramlist which will be used as the parameter text for the macro.
8689: % At the end it will be like "#1 #2 #3\endlinemacro".
8690: \def\linegetparamlist#1;{%
8691: \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
8692: \let\hash\relax
8693: \linegetparamlistxxx#1,;,%
8694: }
8695: \def\linegetparamlistxxx#1,{%
8696: \if#1;\let\next=\linegetparamlistxxxx
8697: \else \let\next=\linegetparamlistxxx
8698: \advance\paramno by 1
8699: \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
8700: {\hash\the\paramno}%
8701: \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno\space}%
8702: \fi\next}
8703: \def\linegetparamlistxxxx{%
8704: \expandafter\fixparamlist\paramlist\fixparamlist
8705: }
8706: % Replace final space token
8707: \def\fixparamlist#1 \fixparamlist{%
8708: \def\paramlist{#1\endlinemacro}%
8709: }
8710:
8711: % Read the body of the macro, replacing backslash-surrounded variables
8712: %
8713: {\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parselinemacrobody#1@end linemacro{%
8714: \xdef\macrobody{#1}%
8715: \endgroup
8716: \linemacrodef
8717: }}
8718:
8719: % Make the definition
8720: \def\linemacrodef{%
8721: \let\hash=##%
8722: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8723: \bgroup
8724: \noexpand\parsearg
8725: \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname
8726: }
8727: \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
8728: \egroup
8729: \expandafter\noexpand
8730: \csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1\noexpand\endlinemacro
8731: }
8732: \expandafter\expandafter
8733: \expandafter\xdef
8734: \expandafter\expandafter\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
8735: \newlinechar=13 % split \macrobody into lines
8736: \noexpand\scantokens{\macrobody}%
8737: }
8738: }
8739:
8740:
8741:
8742: % @alias.
8743: % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
8744: % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
8745: %
8746: \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
8747: \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
8748: \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
8749: {%
8750: \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
8751: \addtomacrolist{#1}%
8752: \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
8753: }%
8754: \next
8755: }
8756:
8757:
8758: \message{cross references,}
8759:
8760: \newwrite\auxfile
8761: \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
8762: \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
8763:
8764: % @inforef is relatively simple.
8765: \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
8766: \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
8767: \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
8768: node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
8769:
8770: % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
8771: % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
8772: % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
8773: % @node foo , bar , ...
8774: % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
8775: %
8776: \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
8777: %
8778: % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
8779: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
8780: \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
8781: \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode}
8782:
8783: % Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex
8784: % conditional.
8785: % \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need
8786: % that here.
8787: \def\omittopnode{%
8788: \ifx\lastnode\wordTop
8789: \expandafter\ignorenode\fi
8790: }
8791: \def\wordTop{Top}
8792:
8793: % Until the next @node, @part or @bye command, divert output to a box that
8794: % is not output.
8795: \def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup
8796: \def\part{\egroup\part}%
8797: \def\node{\egroup\node}%
8798: \ignorenodebye
8799: }
8800:
8801: {\let\bye\relax
8802: \gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef}
8803: \gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}}
8804: % The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer
8805:
8806: \let\lastnode=\empty
8807:
8808: % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
8809: % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
8810: %
8811: \def\donoderef#1{%
8812: \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
8813: \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
8814: \global\let\lastnode=\empty
8815: \fi
8816: }
8817:
8818: % @nodedescription, @nodedescriptionblock - do nothing for TeX
8819: \parseargdef\nodedescription{}
8820: \def\nodedescriptionblock{\doignore{nodedescriptionblock}}
8821:
8822:
8823: % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
8824: %
8825: \newcount\savesfregister
8826: %
8827: \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
8828: \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
8829: \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
8830:
8831: % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
8832: % anchor), which consists of three parts:
8833: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection,
8834: % or the anchor name.
8835: % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
8836: % empty for anchors.
8837: % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
8838: %
8839: % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
8840: % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
8841: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
8842: %
8843: \def\setref#1#2{%
8844: \pdfmkdest{#1}%
8845: \iflinks
8846: {%
8847: \requireauxfile
8848: \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
8849: % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX.
8850: \def\value##1{##1}%
8851: \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
8852: \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
8853: ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
8854: }%
8855: \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}%
8856: \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
8857: \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
8858: \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
8859: }%
8860: \fi
8861: }
8862:
8863: % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
8864: % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
8865: % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
8866: % variable, now it's official.
8867: %
8868: \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
8869: \def\temp{#1}%
8870: \ifx\temp\onword
8871: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
8872: = \empty
8873: \else\ifx\temp\offword
8874: \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
8875: = \relax
8876: \else
8877: \errhelp = \EMsimple
8878: \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
8879: must be on|off}%
8880: \fi\fi
8881: }
8882:
8883: %
8884: % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
8885: % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
8886: % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
8887: % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
8888: %
8889: \def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
8890: \def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
8891: \def\ref{\xrefXX}
8892:
8893: \def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
8894: \def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]}
8895: %
8896: \newbox\toprefbox
8897: \newbox\printedrefnamebox
8898: \newbox\infofilenamebox
8899: \newbox\printedmanualbox
8900: %
8901: \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
8902: \unsepspaces
8903: %
8904: \getprintedrefname{#1}{#3}{#5}%
8905: \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
8906: \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
8907: %
8908: \startxreflink{#1}{#4}%
8909: {%
8910: % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
8911: % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
8912: \indexnofonts
8913: \turnoffactive
8914: \def\value##1{##1}%
8915: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
8916: \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
8917: }%
8918: %
8919: % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
8920: % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by
8921: % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
8922: \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
8923: % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
8924: % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
8925: \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
8926: \refx{#1-snt}%
8927: \else
8928: \printedrefname
8929: \fi
8930: %
8931: % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
8932: % "in MANUALNAME".
8933: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
8934: \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
8935: \fi
8936: \else
8937: % node/anchor (non-float) references.
8938: %
8939: % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
8940: % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
8941: % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
8942: % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
8943: % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
8944: % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
8945: %
8946: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
8947: % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
8948: %
8949: \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
8950: %
8951: \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
8952: % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
8953: % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
8954: % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
8955: %
8956: \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
8957: %
8958: \else
8959: % Reference within this manual.
8960: %
8961: % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty, as the ref
8962: % will be empty for @unnumbered and @anchor.
8963: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}}%
8964: \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
8965: %
8966: % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
8967: \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
8968: %
8969: \ifflagclear{txiomitxrefpg}{%
8970: % We always want a comma
8971: ,%
8972: % output the `page 3'.
8973: \turnoffactive \putpageref{#1}%
8974: % Add a , if xref followed by a space
8975: \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,%
8976: \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB
8977: \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @*
8978: \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE
8979: \else\ifx\
8980: \tokenafterxref ,% @NL
8981: \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie
8982: \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
8983: }{}%
8984: \fi\fi
8985: \fi
8986: \endlink
8987: \endgroup}
8988:
8989: % \getprintedrefname{NODE}{LABEL}{MANUAL}
8990: % - set \printedrefname and \printedmanual
8991: %
8992: \def\getprintedrefname#1#2#3{%
8993: % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
8994: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #2}%
8995: \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
8996: %
8997: \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #3}%
8998: \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
8999: %
9000: % If the printed reference name (arg #2) was not explicitly given in
9001: % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
9002: \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
9003: % No printed node name was explicitly given.
9004: \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
9005: % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
9006: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
9007: \else
9008: % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
9009: % the square brackets if we have it.
9010: \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
9011: % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
9012: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
9013: \else
9014: \ifhavexrefs
9015: % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
9016: \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}}%
9017: \else
9018: % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
9019: \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
9020: \fi%
9021: \fi
9022: \fi
9023: \fi
9024: }
9025:
9026: % \startxreflink{NODE}{FILE} - start link in pdf output.
9027: \def\startxreflink#1#2{%
9028: \ifpdforxetex
9029: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
9030: {\indexnofonts
9031: \makevalueexpandable
9032: \turnoffactive
9033: % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
9034: % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
9035: % #2, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
9036: \getfilename{#2}%
9037: %
9038: % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
9039: % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
9040: \setpdfdestname{#1}%
9041: %
9042: \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
9043: \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
9044: \fi
9045: %
9046: \leavevmode
9047: \ifpdf
9048: \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
9049: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
9050: goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}%
9051: \else
9052: goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}%
9053: \fi
9054: \else % XeTeX
9055: \ifnum\filenamelength>0
9056: % With default settings,
9057: % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers.
9058: % In this case, the replaced destination names of
9059: % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement,
9060: % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
9061: % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+),
9062: % this command line option is no longer necessary
9063: % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special.
9064: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
9065: << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
9066: \else
9067: \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
9068: << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
9069: \fi
9070: \fi
9071: }%
9072: \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
9073: \fi
9074: }
9075:
9076: % can be overridden in translation files
9077: \def\putpageref#1{%
9078: \space\putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}}
9079:
9080: % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
9081: %
9082: % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
9083: % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
9084: % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
9085: %
9086: % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
9087: % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
9088: % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
9089: % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
9090: % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
9091: %
9092: % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
9093: % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
9094: %
9095: \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
9096: \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
9097: \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
9098: \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty?
9099: \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
9100: \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
9101: \fi
9102: \fi
9103: #1%
9104: }
9105:
9106: % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
9107: % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
9108: % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
9109: % one that Bob is working on :).
9110: %
9111: \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
9112:
9113: % @link{NODENAME, LABEL, MANUAL} - create a "plain" link, with no
9114: % page number. Not useful if printed on paper.
9115: %
9116: \def\link#1{\linkX[#1,,,]}
9117: \def\linkX[#1,#2,#3,#4]{%
9118: \begingroup
9119: \unsepspaces
9120: \getprintedrefname{#1}{#2}{#3}%
9121: \startxreflink{#1}{#3}%
9122: \printedrefname
9123: \endlink
9124: \endgroup
9125: }
9126:
9127:
9128: % Things referred to by \setref.
9129: %
9130: \def\Ynothing{}
9131: \def\Yomitfromtoc{}
9132: \def\Ynumbered{%
9133: \ifnum\secno=0
9134: \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
9135: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
9136: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
9137: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
9138: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
9139: \else
9140: \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
9141: \fi\fi\fi
9142: }
9143: \def\Yappendix{%
9144: \ifnum\secno=0
9145: \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
9146: \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
9147: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
9148: \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
9149: \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
9150: \else
9151: \putwordSection@tie
9152: @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
9153: \fi\fi\fi
9154: }
9155:
9156: % \refx{NAME} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
9157: \def\refx#1{%
9158: \requireauxfile
9159: {%
9160: \indexnofonts
9161: \turnoffactive
9162: \def\value##1{##1}%
9163: \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
9164: \csname XR#1\endcsname
9165: }%
9166: \ifx\thisrefX\relax
9167: % If not defined, say something at least.
9168: \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
9169: \iflinks
9170: \ifhavexrefs
9171: {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
9172: \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
9173: \else
9174: \ifwarnedxrefs\else
9175: \global\warnedxrefstrue
9176: \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
9177: \fi
9178: \fi
9179: \fi
9180: \else
9181: % It's defined, so just use it.
9182: \thisrefX
9183: \fi
9184: }
9185:
9186: % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control
9187: % sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence
9188: % name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float
9189: % type, we have more work to do.
9190: %
9191: \def\xrdef#1#2{%
9192: {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences.
9193: % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands
9194: % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition.
9195: \indexnofonts
9196: \turnoffactive
9197: \def\value##1{##1}%
9198: \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
9199: }%
9200: %
9201: \bgroup
9202: \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}%
9203: \egroup
9204: % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on
9205: % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with
9206: % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does
9207: % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax.
9208: %
9209: % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
9210: \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
9211: % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
9212: \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
9213: \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
9214: %
9215: % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
9216: \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
9217: \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
9218: \else
9219: % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
9220: \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
9221: \fi
9222: %
9223: % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
9224: % for later use in \listoffloats.
9225: \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
9226: {\safexrefname}}%
9227: \fi
9228: }
9229:
9230: % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
9231: % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
9232: % This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
9233: %
9234: \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
9235: \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
9236:
9237: % Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
9238: \def\requireauxfile{%
9239: \iflinks
9240: \tryauxfile
9241: % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
9242: \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
9243: \fi
9244: \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once.
9245: }
9246:
9247: % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
9248: %
9249: \def\tryauxfile{%
9250: \openin 1 \jobname.aux
9251: \ifeof 1 \else
9252: \readdatafile{aux}%
9253: \global\havexrefstrue
9254: \fi
9255: \closein 1
9256: }
9257:
9258: \def\setupdatafile{%
9259: \catcode`\^^@=\other
9260: \catcode`\^^A=\other
9261: \catcode`\^^B=\other
9262: \catcode`\^^C=\other
9263: \catcode`\^^D=\other
9264: \catcode`\^^E=\other
9265: \catcode`\^^F=\other
9266: \catcode`\^^G=\other
9267: \catcode`\^^H=\other
9268: \catcode`\^^K=\other
9269: \catcode`\^^L=\other
9270: \catcode`\^^N=\other
9271: \catcode`\^^P=\other
9272: \catcode`\^^Q=\other
9273: \catcode`\^^R=\other
9274: \catcode`\^^S=\other
9275: \catcode`\^^T=\other
9276: \catcode`\^^U=\other
9277: \catcode`\^^V=\other
9278: \catcode`\^^W=\other
9279: \catcode`\^^X=\other
9280: \catcode`\^^Z=\other
9281: \catcode`\^^[=\other
9282: \catcode`\^^\=\other
9283: \catcode`\^^]=\other
9284: \catcode`\^^^=\other
9285: \catcode`\^^_=\other
9286: \catcode`\^=\other
9287: %
9288: % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
9289: \catcode`\~=\other
9290: \catcode`\[=\other
9291: \catcode`\]=\other
9292: \catcode`\"=\other
9293: \catcode`\_=\active
9294: \catcode`\|=\active
9295: \catcode`\<=\active
9296: \catcode`\>=\active
9297: \catcode`\$=\other
9298: \catcode`\#=\other
9299: \catcode`\&=\other
9300: \catcode`\%=\other
9301: \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
9302: %
9303: \catcode`\\=\active
9304: %
9305: % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
9306: \catcode`\{=1
9307: \catcode`\}=2
9308: \catcode`\@=0
9309: }
9310:
9311: \def\readdatafile#1{%
9312: \begingroup
9313: \setupdatafile
9314: \input\jobname.#1
9315: \endgroup}
9316:
9317:
9318: \message{insertions,}
9319: % including footnotes.
9320:
9321: \newcount \footnoteno
9322:
9323: % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
9324: % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
9325: % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
9326: % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
9327: % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
9328: \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
9329:
9330: % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
9331: \let\footnotestyle=\comment
9332:
9333: {\catcode `\@=11
9334: %
9335: % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
9336: \gdef\footnote{%
9337: \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
9338: \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
9339: %
9340: % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
9341: % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
9342: \let\@sf\empty
9343: \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
9344: %
9345: % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
9346: \unskip
9347: \thisfootno\@sf
9348: \dofootnote
9349: }%
9350:
9351: % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
9352: % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
9353: %
9354: % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
9355: % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
9356: % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
9357: %
9358: \gdef\dofootnote{%
9359: \insert\footins\bgroup
9360: %
9361: % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
9362: % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
9363: \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
9364: %
9365: % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
9366: % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
9367: % So reset some parameters.
9368: \hsize=\txipagewidth
9369: \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
9370: \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
9371: \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
9372: \floatingpenalty\@MM
9373: \leftskip\z@skip
9374: \rightskip\z@skip
9375: \spaceskip\z@skip
9376: \xspaceskip\z@skip
9377: \parindent\defaultparindent
9378: %
9379: \smallfonts \rm
9380: %
9381: % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
9382: % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
9383: % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
9384: % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
9385: \let\noindent = \relax
9386: %
9387: % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
9388: % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
9389: \everypar = {\hang}%
9390: \textindent{\thisfootno}%
9391: %
9392: % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
9393: % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
9394: % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
9395: \footstrut
9396: %
9397: % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
9398: \futurelet\next\fo@t
9399: }
9400: }%end \catcode `\@=11
9401:
9402: \def\errfootnotenest{%
9403: \errhelp=\EMsimple
9404: \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
9405: even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
9406: }
9407:
9408: \def\errfootnoteheading{%
9409: \errhelp=\EMsimple
9410: \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
9411: }
9412:
9413: % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
9414: % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
9415: % would be lost.
9416: % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
9417: % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
9418: % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
9419: %
9420: % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
9421: % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
9422: % out prematurely.
9423: %
9424: \def\startsavinginserts{%
9425: \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
9426: \let\insert\saveinsert
9427: \else
9428: \let\checkinserts\relax
9429: \fi
9430: }
9431:
9432: % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
9433: % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
9434: %
9435: \def\saveinsert#1{%
9436: \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
9437: \afterassignment\next
9438: % swallow the left brace
9439: \let\temp =
9440: }
9441: \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
9442: \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
9443:
9444: \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
9445:
9446: \def\placesaveins#1{%
9447: \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
9448: {\box#1}%
9449: }
9450:
9451: % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
9452: {
9453: \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
9454: \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
9455: }
9456:
9457: % initialization:
9458: \def\newsaveins #1{%
9459: \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
9460: \next
9461: }
9462: \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
9463: \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
9464: \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
9465: \checksaveins #1}%
9466: }
9467:
9468: % initialize:
9469: \let\checkinserts\empty
9470: \newsaveins\footins
9471: \newsaveins\margin
9472:
9473:
9474: % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
9475: % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
9476: %
9477: % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
9478: % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
9479: % undone and the next image would fail.
9480: \openin 1 = epsf.tex
9481: \ifeof 1 \else
9482: % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
9483: % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
9484: \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
9485: \input epsf.tex
9486: \fi
9487: \closein 1
9488: %
9489: % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
9490: \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
9491: \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
9492: work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
9493: it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.}
9494: %
9495: \def\image#1{%
9496: \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
9497: \ifwarnednoepsf \else
9498: \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
9499: \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
9500: \global\warnednoepsftrue
9501: \fi
9502: \else
9503: \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
9504: \fi
9505: }
9506:
9507: % Approximate height of a line in the standard text font.
9508: \newdimen\capheight
9509: \setbox0=\vbox{\tenrm H}
9510: \capheight=\ht0
9511:
9512: %
9513: % Arguments to @image:
9514: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
9515: % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
9516: % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
9517: % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
9518: % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
9519: \newif\ifimagevmode
9520: \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
9521: \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
9522: \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
9523: \makevalueexpandable
9524: \ifvmode
9525: \imagevmodetrue
9526: \medskip
9527: % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
9528: % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
9529: % above and below.
9530: \vskip\parskip
9531: %
9532: % Place image in a \vtop for a top page margin that is (close to) correct,
9533: % as \topskip glue is relative to the first baseline.
9534: \vtop\bgroup \kern -\capheight \vskip-\parskip
9535: \fi
9536: %
9537: \ifx\centersub\centerV
9538: % For @center @image, enter vertical mode and add vertical space
9539: % Enter an extra \parskip because @center doesn't add space itself.
9540: \vbox\bgroup\vskip\parskip\medskip\vskip\parskip
9541: \else
9542: % Enter horizontal mode so that indentation from an enclosing
9543: % environment such as @quotation is respected.
9544: % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
9545: % normal paragraph indentation.
9546: \imageindent
9547: \fi
9548: %
9549: % Output the image.
9550: \ifpdf
9551: % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
9552: \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
9553: \else
9554: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
9555: % For epsf.tex
9556: % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
9557: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
9558: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
9559: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
9560: \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
9561: \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
9562: \else
9563: % For XeTeX
9564: \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
9565: \fi
9566: \fi
9567: %
9568: \ifimagevmode
9569: \egroup
9570: \medskip % space after a standalone image
9571: \fi
9572: \ifx\centersub\centerV % @center @image
9573: \medskip
9574: \egroup % close \vbox
9575: \fi
9576: \endgroup}
9577:
9578:
9579: % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
9580: % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
9581: % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
9582: %
9583: \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
9584:
9585: % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
9586: \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
9587:
9588: % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
9589: % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
9590: % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
9591: %
9592: % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
9593: % be referable.
9594: %
9595: % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
9596: % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
9597: %
9598: % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
9599: % chapter-level command.
9600: \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
9601: %
9602: \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
9603: \let\thiscaption=\empty
9604: \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
9605: %
9606: % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
9607: %
9608: % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
9609: % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
9610: %
9611: \startsavinginserts
9612: %
9613: % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
9614: \par
9615: %
9616: \vtop\bgroup
9617: \def\floattype{#1}%
9618: \def\floatlabel{#2}%
9619: \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
9620: %
9621: \ifx\floattype\empty
9622: \let\safefloattype=\empty
9623: \else
9624: {%
9625: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
9626: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
9627: \indexnofonts
9628: \turnoffactive
9629: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
9630: }%
9631: \fi
9632: %
9633: % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
9634: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
9635: % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
9636: % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
9637: %
9638: \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
9639: \global\advance\floatno by 1
9640: %
9641: {%
9642: % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the
9643: % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
9644: % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
9645: % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
9646: % lists of floats.
9647: %
9648: \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
9649: \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
9650: }%
9651: \fi
9652: %
9653: % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
9654: \vskip\parskip
9655: %
9656: % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
9657: \restorefirstparagraphindent
9658: }
9659:
9660: % we have these possibilities:
9661: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
9662: % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
9663: % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
9664: % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
9665: % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
9666: % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
9667: % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
9668: % @float & no caption:
9669: %
9670: \def\Efloat{%
9671: \let\floatident = \empty
9672: %
9673: % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
9674: \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
9675: %
9676: % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
9677: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
9678: \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
9679: \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
9680: \fi
9681: % the number.
9682: \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
9683: \fi
9684: %
9685: % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
9686: % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
9687: \let\captionline = \floatident
9688: %
9689: \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
9690: \ifx\floatident\empty \else
9691: \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
9692: \fi
9693: %
9694: % caption text.
9695: \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
9696: \fi
9697: %
9698: % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
9699: % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
9700: \ifx\captionline\empty \else
9701: \vskip.5\parskip
9702: \captionline
9703: %
9704: % Space below caption.
9705: \vskip\parskip
9706: \fi
9707: %
9708: % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
9709: % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
9710: \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
9711: % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
9712: % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
9713: % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
9714: {%
9715: \requireauxfile
9716: \atdummies
9717: %
9718: \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
9719: \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}%
9720: \else
9721: \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}%
9722: \fi
9723: \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
9724: \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
9725: }%
9726: \fi
9727: \egroup % end of \vtop
9728: %
9729: \checkinserts
9730: }
9731:
9732: % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
9733: %
9734: \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
9735: \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
9736: }
9737:
9738: % @caption, @shortcaption
9739: %
9740: \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
9741: \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
9742: \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanctxt\docaptionz}
9743: \def\docaptionz#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
9744:
9745: % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
9746: % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
9747: \def\getfloatno#1{%
9748: \ifx#1\relax
9749: % Haven't seen this figure type before.
9750: \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
9751: %
9752: % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
9753: \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
9754: \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
9755: \fi
9756: \let\floatno#1%
9757: }
9758:
9759: % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
9760: % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
9761: % first read the @float command.
9762: %
9763: \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
9764:
9765: % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
9766: % distinguish floats from other xref types.
9767: \def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
9768:
9769: % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
9770: % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
9771: % \currentsection value which we \setref above.
9772: %
9773: \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
9774: %
9775: % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
9776: % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
9777: %
9778: \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
9779: \def\temp{#1}%
9780: \def\iffloattype{#2}%
9781: \ifx\temp\floatmagic
9782: }
9783:
9784: % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
9785: %
9786: \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
9787: \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
9788: {%
9789: % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
9790: % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
9791: \indexnofonts
9792: \turnoffactive
9793: \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
9794: }%
9795: %
9796: % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
9797: \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
9798: \ifhavexrefs
9799: % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
9800: \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
9801: \fi
9802: \else
9803: \begingroup
9804: \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
9805: \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
9806: \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
9807: \endgroup
9808: \fi
9809: }
9810:
9811: % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
9812: % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
9813: % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
9814: % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
9815: %
9816: % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
9817: % they won't appear in the aux file).
9818: %
9819: \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
9820: \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
9821: % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
9822: % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
9823: % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
9824: % in pdf output.
9825: \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
9826: %
9827: % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
9828: \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
9829: \writeentry
9830: }}
9831:
9832:
9833: \message{localization,}
9834:
9835: % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
9836: % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
9837: % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
9838: %
9839: {
9840: \catcode`\_ = \active
9841: \globaldefs=1
9842: \parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
9843: \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
9844: % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
9845: \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test
9846: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
9847: \ifeof 1
9848: \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
9849: \else
9850: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
9851: \input txi-#1.tex
9852: \fi
9853: \closein 1
9854: \endgroup % end raw TeX
9855: }
9856: %
9857: % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
9858: % try txi-de.tex.
9859: %
9860: \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
9861: \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
9862: \ifeof 1
9863: \errhelp = \nolanghelp
9864: \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
9865: \else
9866: \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
9867: \input txi-#1.tex
9868: \fi
9869: \closein 1
9870: }
9871: }% end of special _ catcode
9872: %
9873: \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
9874: is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
9875: directory should work if nowhere else does.}
9876:
9877: % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
9878: % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
9879: % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
9880: %
9881: % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
9882: % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
9883: % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
9884: %
9885: % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
9886: % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
9887: % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
9888: % accented characters problem.)
9889: %
9890: \catcode`@=11
9891: \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
9892: % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
9893: \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
9894: \message{no patterns for #1}%
9895: \else
9896: \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
9897: \fi
9898: % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
9899: \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
9900: \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
9901: }
9902:
9903: % XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively.
9904: % Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation.
9905: % Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise.
9906: %
9907: \newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable
9908: \newif\iftxiusebytewiseio
9909:
9910: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
9911: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
9912: \txinativeunicodecapablefalse
9913: \txiusebytewiseiotrue
9914: \else
9915: \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
9916: \txiusebytewiseiofalse
9917: \fi
9918: \else
9919: \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
9920: \txiusebytewiseiofalse
9921: \fi
9922:
9923: % Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex
9924: % for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings.
9925: %
9926: \def\setbytewiseio{%
9927: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
9928: \else
9929: \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read
9930: \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file
9931: % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
9932: % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
9933: % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
9934: % place of non-ASCII characters.
9935: \fi
9936:
9937: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
9938: \else
9939: \directlua{
9940: local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub
9941: local function convert_char (char)
9942: return utf8_char(byte(char))
9943: end
9944:
9945: local function convert_line (line)
9946: return gsub(line, ".", convert_char)
9947: end
9948:
9949: callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line)
9950:
9951: local function convert_line_out (line)
9952: local line_out = ""
9953: for c in string.utfvalues(line) do
9954: line_out = line_out .. string.char(c)
9955: end
9956: return line_out
9957: end
9958:
9959: callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out)
9960: }
9961: \fi
9962:
9963: \txiusebytewiseiotrue
9964: }
9965:
9966:
9967: % Helpers for encodings.
9968: % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
9969: %
9970: \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
9971: \count255=128
9972: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
9973: \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
9974: \advance\count255 by 1
9975: \repeat
9976: }
9977:
9978: \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
9979: \count255=128
9980: \loop\ifnum\count255<256
9981: \catcode\count255=#1\relax
9982: \advance\count255 by 1
9983: \repeat
9984: }
9985:
9986: % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
9987: % according to the specified encoding.
9988: %
9989: \def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
9990: \def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
9991: %
9992: % Encoding being declared for the document.
9993: \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
9994: %
9995: % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
9996: % to compare them with \ifx.
9997: \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
9998: \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
9999: \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
10000: \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
10001: \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
10002: %
10003: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
10004: \asciichardefs
10005: %
10006: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
10007: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10008: \setbytewiseio
10009: \fi
10010: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
10011: \lattwochardefs
10012: %
10013: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
10014: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10015: \setbytewiseio
10016: \fi
10017: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
10018: \latonechardefs
10019: %
10020: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
10021: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10022: \setbytewiseio
10023: \fi
10024: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
10025: \latninechardefs
10026: %
10027: \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
10028: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10029: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
10030: \nativeunicodechardefs
10031: \else
10032: % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX).
10033: % Since we already invoke \utfeightchardefs at the top level,
10034: % making non-ascii chars active is sufficient.
10035: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
10036: \fi
10037: %
10038: \else
10039: \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}%
10040: %
10041: \fi % utfeight
10042: \fi % latnine
10043: \fi % latone
10044: \fi % lattwo
10045: \fi % ascii
10046: %
10047: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
10048: \else
10049: \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
10050: \else
10051: \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
10052: \else
10053: \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle %
10054: non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}%
10055: \fi
10056: \fi
10057: \fi
10058: }
10059:
10060: % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
10061: % the default font encoding (OT1).
10062: %
10063: \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}}
10064:
10065: % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
10066: \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
10067:
10068: \def\gdefchar#1#2{%
10069: \gdef#1{%
10070: \ifpassthroughchars
10071: \string#1%
10072: \else
10073: #2%
10074: \fi
10075: }}
10076:
10077: \begingroup
10078:
10079: % Make non-ASCII characters active for defining the character definition
10080: % macros.
10081: \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
10082:
10083: % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
10084: \gdef\latonechardefs{%
10085: \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
10086: \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown}
10087: \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
10088: \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}}
10089: \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
10090: \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
10091: \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
10092: \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
10093: \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
10094: \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}}
10095: \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf}
10096: \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}}
10097: \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot}
10098: \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
10099: \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}}
10100: \gdefchar^^af{\={}}
10101: %
10102: \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
10103: \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$}
10104: \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$}
10105: \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$}
10106: \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
10107: \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$}
10108: \gdefchar^^b6{\P}
10109: \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot}
10110: \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
10111: \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$}
10112: \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm}
10113: \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}}
10114: \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$}
10115: \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$}
10116: \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$}
10117: \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown}
10118: %
10119: \gdefchar^^c0{\`A}
10120: \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
10121: \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
10122: \gdefchar^^c3{\~A}
10123: \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
10124: \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A}
10125: \gdefchar^^c6{\AE}
10126: \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
10127: \gdefchar^^c8{\`E}
10128: \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
10129: \gdefchar^^ca{\^E}
10130: \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
10131: \gdefchar^^cc{\`I}
10132: \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
10133: \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
10134: \gdefchar^^cf{\"I}
10135: %
10136: \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
10137: \gdefchar^^d1{\~N}
10138: \gdefchar^^d2{\`O}
10139: \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
10140: \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
10141: \gdefchar^^d5{\~O}
10142: \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
10143: \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
10144: \gdefchar^^d8{\O}
10145: \gdefchar^^d9{\`U}
10146: \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
10147: \gdefchar^^db{\^U}
10148: \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
10149: \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
10150: \gdefchar^^de{\TH}
10151: \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
10152: %
10153: \gdefchar^^e0{\`a}
10154: \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
10155: \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
10156: \gdefchar^^e3{\~a}
10157: \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
10158: \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a}
10159: \gdefchar^^e6{\ae}
10160: \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
10161: \gdefchar^^e8{\`e}
10162: \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
10163: \gdefchar^^ea{\^e}
10164: \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
10165: \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
10166: \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
10167: \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
10168: \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
10169: %
10170: \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
10171: \gdefchar^^f1{\~n}
10172: \gdefchar^^f2{\`o}
10173: \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
10174: \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
10175: \gdefchar^^f5{\~o}
10176: \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
10177: \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
10178: \gdefchar^^f8{\o}
10179: \gdefchar^^f9{\`u}
10180: \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
10181: \gdefchar^^fb{\^u}
10182: \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
10183: \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
10184: \gdefchar^^fe{\th}
10185: \gdefchar^^ff{\"y}
10186: }
10187:
10188: % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
10189: \gdef\latninechardefs{%
10190: % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
10191: \latonechardefs
10192: %
10193: \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}}
10194: \gdefchar^^a6{\v S}
10195: \gdefchar^^a8{\v s}
10196: \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z}
10197: \gdefchar^^b8{\v z}
10198: \gdefchar^^bc{\OE}
10199: \gdefchar^^bd{\oe}
10200: \gdefchar^^be{\"Y}
10201: }
10202:
10203: % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
10204: \gdef\lattwochardefs{%
10205: \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
10206: \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
10207: \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}}
10208: \gdefchar^^a3{\L}
10209: \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
10210: \gdefchar^^a5{\v L}
10211: \gdefchar^^a6{\'S}
10212: \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
10213: \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
10214: \gdefchar^^a9{\v S}
10215: \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S}
10216: \gdefchar^^ab{\v T}
10217: \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z}
10218: \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
10219: \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z}
10220: \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z}
10221: %
10222: \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
10223: \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
10224: \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
10225: \gdefchar^^b3{\l}
10226: \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
10227: \gdefchar^^b5{\v l}
10228: \gdefchar^^b6{\'s}
10229: \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}}
10230: \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
10231: \gdefchar^^b9{\v s}
10232: \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s}
10233: \gdefchar^^bb{\v t}
10234: \gdefchar^^bc{\'z}
10235: \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}}
10236: \gdefchar^^be{\v z}
10237: \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z}
10238: %
10239: \gdefchar^^c0{\'R}
10240: \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
10241: \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
10242: \gdefchar^^c3{\u A}
10243: \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
10244: \gdefchar^^c5{\'L}
10245: \gdefchar^^c6{\'C}
10246: \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
10247: \gdefchar^^c8{\v C}
10248: \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
10249: \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
10250: \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
10251: \gdefchar^^cc{\v E}
10252: \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
10253: \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
10254: \gdefchar^^cf{\v D}
10255: %
10256: \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
10257: \gdefchar^^d1{\'N}
10258: \gdefchar^^d2{\v N}
10259: \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
10260: \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
10261: \gdefchar^^d5{\H O}
10262: \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
10263: \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
10264: \gdefchar^^d8{\v R}
10265: \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U}
10266: \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
10267: \gdefchar^^db{\H U}
10268: \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
10269: \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
10270: \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T}
10271: \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
10272: %
10273: \gdefchar^^e0{\'r}
10274: \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
10275: \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
10276: \gdefchar^^e3{\u a}
10277: \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
10278: \gdefchar^^e5{\'l}
10279: \gdefchar^^e6{\'c}
10280: \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
10281: \gdefchar^^e8{\v c}
10282: \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
10283: \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
10284: \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
10285: \gdefchar^^ec{\v e}
10286: \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
10287: \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
10288: \gdefchar^^ef{\v d}
10289: %
10290: \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
10291: \gdefchar^^f1{\'n}
10292: \gdefchar^^f2{\v n}
10293: \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
10294: \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
10295: \gdefchar^^f5{\H o}
10296: \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
10297: \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
10298: \gdefchar^^f8{\v r}
10299: \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u}
10300: \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
10301: \gdefchar^^fb{\H u}
10302: \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
10303: \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
10304: \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t}
10305: \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
10306: }
10307:
10308: \endgroup % active chars
10309:
10310: % UTF-8 character definitions.
10311: %
10312: % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
10313: % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
10314: % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
10315: %
10316: \newcount\countUTFx
10317: \newcount\countUTFy
10318: \newcount\countUTFz
10319:
10320: \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
10321: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
10322: %
10323: \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
10324: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
10325: %
10326: \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
10327: \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
10328:
10329: \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
10330: \ifx #1\relax
10331: \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
10332: \else
10333: \expandafter #1%
10334: \fi
10335: }
10336:
10337: % Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences
10338: \begingroup
10339: \catcode`\~13
10340: \catcode`\$12
10341: \catcode`\"12
10342:
10343: % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp
10344: % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value.
10345: \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
10346: \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
10347: \uccode`\~\countUTFx
10348: \uccode`\$\countUTFx
10349: \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
10350: \advance\countUTFx by 1
10351: \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
10352: \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
10353: \fi}
10354:
10355: % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to
10356: % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files.
10357: \countUTFx = "80
10358: \countUTFy = "C2
10359: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
10360: \gdef~{%
10361: \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}%
10362: \UTFviiiLoop
10363:
10364: \countUTFx = "C2
10365: \countUTFy = "E0
10366: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
10367: \gdef~{%
10368: \ifpassthroughchars $%
10369: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
10370: \UTFviiiLoop
10371:
10372: \countUTFx = "E0
10373: \countUTFy = "F0
10374: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
10375: \gdef~{%
10376: \ifpassthroughchars $%
10377: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
10378: \UTFviiiLoop
10379:
10380: \countUTFx = "F0
10381: \countUTFy = "F4
10382: \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
10383: \gdef~{%
10384: \ifpassthroughchars $%
10385: \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi
10386: }}%
10387: \UTFviiiLoop
10388: \endgroup
10389:
10390: \def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
10391:
10392: % @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
10393: \def\U#1{%
10394: \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
10395: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10396: % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is
10397: % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph,
10398: % letters are missing.
10399: \begingroup
10400: \uccode`\.="#1\relax
10401: \uppercase{.}
10402: \endgroup
10403: \else
10404: \errhelp = \EMsimple
10405: \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
10406: \fi
10407: \else
10408: \csname uni:#1\endcsname
10409: \fi
10410: }
10411:
10412: % These macros are used here to construct the name of a control
10413: % sequence to be defined.
10414: \def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{%
10415: \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}%
10416: \def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{%
10417: \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}%
10418: \def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{%
10419: \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}%
10420:
10421: % For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX),
10422: % provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character;
10423: % this gets used by the @U command
10424: %
10425: \begingroup
10426: \catcode`\"=12
10427: \catcode`\<=12
10428: \catcode`\.=12
10429: \catcode`\,=12
10430: \catcode`\;=12
10431: \catcode`\!=12
10432: \catcode`\~=13
10433: \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{%
10434: \countUTFz = "#1\relax
10435: \begingroup
10436: \parseXMLCharref
10437:
10438: % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's
10439: % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g.
10440: %
10441: % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2
10442: % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname
10443: % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token)
10444: %
10445: \expandafter\expandafter
10446: \expandafter\expandafter
10447: \expandafter\expandafter
10448: \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
10449: %
10450: \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else
10451: \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}%
10452: \fi
10453: %
10454: % define an additional control sequence for this code point.
10455: \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
10456: \endgroup}
10457: %
10458: % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp
10459: % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence.
10460: \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
10461: \ifnum\countUTFz < "20\relax
10462: \errhelp = \EMsimple
10463: \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 0020}%
10464: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
10465: \parseUTFviiiA,%
10466: \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,%
10467: \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
10468: \parseUTFviiiA;%
10469: \parseUTFviiiA,%
10470: \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}%
10471: \else
10472: \parseUTFviiiA;%
10473: \parseUTFviiiA,%
10474: \parseUTFviiiA!%
10475: \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}%
10476: \fi\fi\fi
10477: }
10478:
10479: % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx.
10480: % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence.
10481: % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one
10482: % of the bytes.
10483: \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
10484: \countUTFx = \countUTFz
10485: \divide\countUTFz by 64
10486: \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz.
10487: \multiply\countUTFz by 64
10488:
10489: % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract
10490: % in order to get the last five bits.
10491: \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
10492:
10493: % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence.
10494: \advance\countUTFx by 128
10495: \uccode `#1\countUTFx
10496: \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
10497:
10498: % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp
10499: % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8
10500: % sequence.
10501: % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros.
10502: % #3 is always a full stop (.)
10503: % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these
10504: % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's.
10505: \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
10506: \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
10507: \uccode `#3\countUTFz
10508: \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
10509: \endgroup
10510:
10511: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
10512: % provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally
10513: %
10514: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{%
10515: \catcode"#1=\other
10516: }
10517:
10518: % https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
10519: % U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
10520: % U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
10521: % U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
10522: % U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
10523: %
10524: % Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
10525: % characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts
10526: % awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without
10527: % reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
10528: % plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
10529: % We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at
10530: % least make most of the characters not bomb out.
10531: %
10532: \def\unicodechardefs{%
10533: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0020}{ } % space
10534: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0021}{\char"21 }% % space to terminate number
10535: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0022}{\char"22 }%
10536: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0023}{\char"23 }%
10537: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0024}{\char"24 }%
10538: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0025}{\char"25 }%
10539: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0026}{\char"26 }%
10540: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0027}{\char"27 }%
10541: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0028}{\char"28 }%
10542: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0029}{\char"29 }%
10543: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002A}{\char"2A }%
10544: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002B}{\char"2B }%
10545: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002C}{\char"2C }%
10546: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002D}{\char"2D }%
10547: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002E}{\char"2E }%
10548: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{002F}{\char"2F }%
10549: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0030}{0}%
10550: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0031}{1}%
10551: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0032}{2}%
10552: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0033}{3}%
10553: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0034}{4}%
10554: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0035}{5}%
10555: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0036}{6}%
10556: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0037}{7}%
10557: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0038}{8}%
10558: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0039}{9}%
10559: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003A}{\char"3A }%
10560: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003B}{\char"3B }%
10561: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003C}{\char"3C }%
10562: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003D}{\char"3D }%
10563: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003E}{\char"3E }%
10564: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{003F}{\char"3F }%
10565: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0040}{\char"40 }%
10566: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0041}{A}%
10567: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0042}{B}%
10568: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0043}{C}%
10569: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0044}{D}%
10570: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0045}{E}%
10571: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0046}{F}%
10572: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0047}{G}%
10573: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0048}{H}%
10574: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0049}{I}%
10575: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004A}{J}%
10576: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004B}{K}%
10577: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004C}{L}%
10578: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004D}{M}%
10579: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004E}{N}%
10580: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{004F}{O}%
10581: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0050}{P}%
10582: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0051}{Q}%
10583: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0052}{R}%
10584: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0053}{S}%
10585: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0054}{T}%
10586: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0055}{U}%
10587: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0056}{V}%
10588: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0057}{W}%
10589: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0058}{X}%
10590: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0059}{Y}%
10591: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005A}{Z}%
10592: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005B}{\char"5B }%
10593: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005C}{\char"5C }%
10594: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005D}{\char"5D }%
10595: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005E}{\char"5E }%
10596: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{005F}{\char"5F }%
10597: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0060}{\char"60 }%
10598: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0061}{a}%
10599: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0062}{b}%
10600: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0063}{c}%
10601: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0064}{d}%
10602: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0065}{e}%
10603: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0066}{f}%
10604: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0067}{g}%
10605: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0068}{h}%
10606: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0069}{i}%
10607: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006A}{j}%
10608: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006B}{k}%
10609: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006C}{l}%
10610: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006D}{m}%
10611: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006E}{n}%
10612: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{006F}{o}%
10613: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0070}{p}%
10614: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0071}{q}%
10615: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0072}{r}%
10616: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0073}{s}%
10617: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0074}{t}%
10618: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0075}{u}%
10619: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0076}{v}%
10620: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0077}{w}%
10621: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0078}{x}%
10622: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0079}{y}%
10623: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007A}{z}%
10624: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007B}{\char"7B }%
10625: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007C}{\char"7C }%
10626: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007D}{\char"7D }%
10627: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007E}{\char"7E }%
10628: % \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{007F}{} % DEL
10629: %
10630: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}%
10631: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}%
10632: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
10633: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}%
10634: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
10635: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
10636: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
10637: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}%
10638: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}%
10639: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}%
10640: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}%
10641: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}%
10642: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}%
10643: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}%
10644: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}%
10645: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}%
10646: %
10647: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\textdegree}%
10648: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}%
10649: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}%
10650: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}%
10651: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}%
10652: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}%
10653: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}%
10654: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
10655: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}%
10656: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}%
10657: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}%
10658: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}%
10659: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}%
10660: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}%
10661: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}%
10662: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}%
10663: %
10664: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}%
10665: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}%
10666: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}%
10667: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}%
10668: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}%
10669: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}%
10670: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}%
10671: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}%
10672: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}%
10673: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}%
10674: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}%
10675: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}%
10676: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}%
10677: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}%
10678: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}%
10679: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}%
10680: %
10681: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}%
10682: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}%
10683: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}%
10684: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}%
10685: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}%
10686: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}%
10687: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}%
10688: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}%
10689: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}%
10690: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}%
10691: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}%
10692: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}%
10693: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}%
10694: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}%
10695: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}%
10696: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}%
10697: %
10698: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}%
10699: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}%
10700: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}%
10701: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}%
10702: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}%
10703: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}%
10704: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}%
10705: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}%
10706: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}%
10707: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}%
10708: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}%
10709: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}%
10710: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}%
10711: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}%
10712: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}%
10713: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}%
10714: %
10715: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}%
10716: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}%
10717: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}%
10718: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}%
10719: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}%
10720: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}%
10721: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}%
10722: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}%
10723: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}%
10724: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}%
10725: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}%
10726: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}%
10727: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}%
10728: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}%
10729: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}%
10730: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}%
10731: %
10732: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}%
10733: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}%
10734: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}%
10735: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}%
10736: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}%
10737: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}%
10738: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}%
10739: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}%
10740: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}%
10741: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}%
10742: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}%
10743: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}%
10744: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}%
10745: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}%
10746: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}%
10747: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}%
10748: %
10749: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}%
10750: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}%
10751: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}%
10752: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}%
10753: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}%
10754: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}%
10755: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}%
10756: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}%
10757: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}%
10758: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}%
10759: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}%
10760: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}%
10761: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}%
10762: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}%
10763: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}%
10764: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}%
10765: %
10766: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}%
10767: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}%
10768: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}%
10769: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}%
10770: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}%
10771: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}%
10772: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
10773: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
10774: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}%
10775: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}%
10776: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}%
10777: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}%
10778: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}%
10779: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}%
10780: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}%
10781: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}%
10782: %
10783: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}%
10784: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}%
10785: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}%
10786: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}%
10787: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}%
10788: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}%
10789: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}%
10790: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}%
10791: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
10792: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}%
10793: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}%
10794: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}%
10795: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}%
10796: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern
10797: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern
10798: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}%
10799: %
10800: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}%
10801: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}%
10802: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}%
10803: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}%
10804: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}%
10805: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}%
10806: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}%
10807: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}%
10808: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}%
10809: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}%
10810: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}%
10811: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}%
10812: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}%
10813: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}%
10814: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}%
10815: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}%
10816: %
10817: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}%
10818: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}%
10819: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}%
10820: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}%
10821: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}%
10822: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}%
10823: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}%
10824: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}%
10825: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}%
10826: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}%
10827: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}%
10828: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}%
10829: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}%
10830: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}%
10831: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}%
10832: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}%
10833: %
10834: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}%
10835: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}%
10836: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}%
10837: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}%
10838: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}%
10839: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}%
10840: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
10841: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
10842: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}%
10843: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}%
10844: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}%
10845: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}%
10846: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}%
10847: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}%
10848: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}%
10849: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}%
10850: %
10851: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}%
10852: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}%
10853: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}%
10854: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}%
10855: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}%
10856: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}%
10857: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}%
10858: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}%
10859: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}%
10860: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}%
10861: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}%
10862: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}%
10863: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}%
10864: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}%
10865: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}%
10866: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}%
10867: %
10868: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}%
10869: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}%
10870: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}%
10871: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}%
10872: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}%
10873: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}%
10874: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}%
10875: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}%
10876: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}%
10877: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}%
10878: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}%
10879: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}%
10880: %
10881: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}%
10882: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}%
10883: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}%
10884: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}%
10885: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}%
10886: %
10887: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}%
10888: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}%
10889: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}%
10890: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}%
10891: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}%
10892: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}%
10893: %
10894: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}%
10895: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}%
10896: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}%
10897: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}%
10898: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}%
10899: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}%
10900: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}%
10901: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}%
10902: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}%
10903: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}%
10904: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}%
10905: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}%
10906: %
10907: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}%
10908: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}%
10909: %
10910: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}%
10911: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}%
10912: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}%
10913: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}%
10914: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}%
10915: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}%
10916: %
10917: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}%
10918: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}%
10919: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}%
10920: %
10921: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}%
10922: %
10923: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}%
10924: %
10925: % Greek letters upper case
10926: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}%
10927: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}%
10928: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}%
10929: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}%
10930: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}%
10931: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}%
10932: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}%
10933: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}%
10934: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}%
10935: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}%
10936: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}%
10937: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}%
10938: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}%
10939: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}%
10940: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}%
10941: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}%
10942: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}%
10943: %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
10944: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}%
10945: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}%
10946: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}%
10947: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}%
10948: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}%
10949: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}%
10950: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}%
10951: %
10952: % Vowels with accents
10953: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}%
10954: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}%
10955: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}%
10956: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}%
10957: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}%
10958: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}%
10959: %
10960: % Standalone accent
10961: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}%
10962: %
10963: % Greek letters lower case
10964: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}%
10965: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}%
10966: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}%
10967: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}%
10968: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}%
10969: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}%
10970: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}%
10971: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}%
10972: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}%
10973: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
10974: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}%
10975: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}%
10976: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}%
10977: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}%
10978: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron
10979: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}%
10980: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}%
10981: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}%
10982: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}%
10983: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}%
10984: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}%
10985: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}%
10986: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}%
10987: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}%
10988: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}%
10989: %
10990: % More Greek vowels with accents
10991: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}%
10992: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}%
10993: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}%
10994: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}%
10995: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}%
10996: %
10997: % Variant Greek letters
10998: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}%
10999: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}%
11000: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}%
11001: %
11002: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}%
11003: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}%
11004: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}%
11005: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}%
11006: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}%
11007: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}%
11008: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}%
11009: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}%
11010: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}%
11011: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}%
11012: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}%
11013: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}%
11014: %
11015: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}%
11016: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}%
11017: %
11018: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}%
11019: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}%
11020: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}%
11021: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}%
11022: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}%
11023: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}%
11024: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}%
11025: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}%
11026: %
11027: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}%
11028: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}%
11029: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}%
11030: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}%
11031: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}%
11032: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}%
11033: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}%
11034: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}%
11035: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}%
11036: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}%
11037: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}%
11038: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}%
11039: %
11040: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}%
11041: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}%
11042: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}%
11043: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}%
11044: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}%
11045: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}%
11046: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}%
11047: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}%
11048: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}%
11049: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}%
11050: %
11051: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}%
11052: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}%
11053: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}%
11054: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}%
11055: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}%
11056: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}%
11057: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}%
11058: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}%
11059: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}%
11060: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}%
11061: %
11062: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}%
11063: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}%
11064: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}%
11065: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}%
11066: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}%
11067: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}%
11068: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}%
11069: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}%
11070: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}%
11071: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}%
11072: %
11073: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}%
11074: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}%
11075: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}%
11076: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}%
11077: %
11078: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}%
11079: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}%
11080: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}%
11081: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}%
11082: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}%
11083: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}%
11084: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}%
11085: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}%
11086: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}%
11087: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}%
11088: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}%
11089: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}%
11090: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}%
11091: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}%
11092: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}%
11093: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}%
11094: %
11095: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}%
11096: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}%
11097: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}%
11098: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}%
11099: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}%
11100: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}%
11101: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}%
11102: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}%
11103: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}%
11104: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}%
11105: %
11106: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}%
11107: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}%
11108: %
11109: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}%
11110: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}%
11111: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}%
11112: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}%
11113: %
11114: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}%
11115: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}%
11116: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}%
11117: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}%
11118: %
11119: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}%
11120: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}%
11121: %
11122: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}%
11123: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}%
11124: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}%
11125: %
11126: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}%
11127: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}%
11128: %
11129: % Exotic spaces
11130: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2007}{\hphantom{0}}%
11131: %
11132: % Punctuation
11133: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}%
11134: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}%
11135: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}%
11136: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}%
11137: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}%
11138: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}%
11139: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}%
11140: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}%
11141: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}%
11142: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}%
11143: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}%
11144: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}%
11145: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}%
11146: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}%
11147: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}%
11148: %
11149: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}%
11150: %
11151: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\arrow}%
11152: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}%
11153: %
11154: % Mathematical symbols
11155: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}%
11156: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}%
11157: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}%
11158: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}%
11159: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}%
11160: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}%
11161: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}%
11162: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}%
11163: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}%
11164: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}%
11165: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}%
11166: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}%
11167: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}%
11168: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}%
11169: %
11170: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}%
11171: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}%
11172: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}%
11173: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}%
11174: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}%
11175: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}%
11176: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}%
11177: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}%
11178: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}%
11179: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}%
11180: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}%
11181: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}%
11182: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}%
11183: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}%
11184: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}%
11185: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}%
11186: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}%
11187: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}%
11188: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}%
11189: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}%
11190: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}%
11191: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}%
11192: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}%
11193: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}%
11194: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}%
11195: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}%
11196: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}%
11197: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}%
11198: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}%
11199: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}%
11200: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}%
11201: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}%
11202: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}%
11203: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}%
11204: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}%
11205: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}%
11206: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}%
11207: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}%
11208: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}%
11209: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}%
11210: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}%
11211: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}%
11212: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}%
11213: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}%
11214: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}%
11215: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}%
11216: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}%
11217: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}%
11218: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}%
11219: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}%
11220: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}%
11221: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}%
11222: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}%
11223: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}%
11224: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}%
11225: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}%
11226: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}%
11227: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}%
11228: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}%
11229: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}%
11230: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}%
11231: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}%
11232: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}%
11233: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}%
11234: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}%
11235: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}%
11236: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}%
11237: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}%
11238: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}%
11239: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}%
11240: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}%
11241: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}%
11242: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}%
11243: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}%
11244: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}%
11245: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}%
11246: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}%
11247: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}%
11248: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}%
11249: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}%
11250: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}%
11251: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
11252: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
11253: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}%
11254: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}%
11255: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}%
11256: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}%
11257: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}%
11258: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}%
11259: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}%
11260: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}%
11261: %
11262: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}%
11263: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}%
11264: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}%
11265: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
11266: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
11267: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}%
11268: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}%
11269: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}%
11270: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}%
11271: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}%
11272: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}%
11273: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}%
11274: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}%
11275: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}%
11276: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}%
11277: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}%
11278: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}%
11279: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}%
11280: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}%
11281: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}%
11282: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}%
11283: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}%
11284: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}%
11285: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}%
11286: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}%
11287: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}%
11288: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}%
11289: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}%
11290: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}%
11291: %
11292: \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign
11293: \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}%
11294: }% end of \unicodechardefs
11295:
11296: % UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command)
11297: % It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence.
11298: \def\utfeightchardefs{%
11299: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii
11300: \unicodechardefs
11301: }
11302:
11303: % Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to
11304: % non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to
11305: % write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for
11306: % printing the correct glyphs.
11307: \newif\ifpassthroughchars
11308: \passthroughcharsfalse
11309:
11310: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
11311: % provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character
11312: %
11313: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{%
11314: \ifnum"#1>"7F % only make non-ASCII chars active
11315: \catcode"#1=\active
11316: \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{%
11317: \begingroup
11318: \uccode`\~="##2\relax
11319: \uppercase{\gdef~}{%
11320: \ifpassthroughchars
11321: ##1%
11322: \else
11323: ##3%
11324: \fi
11325: }
11326: \endgroup
11327: }
11328: \begingroup
11329: \uccode`\.="#1\relax
11330: \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}%
11331: \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}%
11332: \endgroup
11333: \fi
11334: }
11335:
11336: % Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition.
11337: % It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters.
11338: \def\nativeunicodechardefs{%
11339: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative
11340: \unicodechardefs
11341: }
11342:
11343: % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
11344: % make the character token expand
11345: % to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing.
11346: \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{%
11347: \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2}
11348: \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp
11349: }
11350:
11351: % @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX).
11352: \def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{%
11353: \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU
11354: \unicodechardefs
11355: }
11356:
11357: % US-ASCII character definitions.
11358: \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
11359: \relax
11360: }
11361:
11362: % Define all Unicode characters we know about
11363: \iftxinativeunicodecapable
11364: \nativeunicodechardefsatu
11365: \else
11366: \utfeightchardefs
11367: \fi
11368:
11369:
11370: \message{formatting,}
11371:
11372: \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
11373:
11374: \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
11375: \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
11376: \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
11377:
11378: % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
11379: \vbadness = 10000
11380:
11381: % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
11382: \hbadness = 6666
11383:
11384: % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
11385: \widowpenalty=10000
11386: \clubpenalty=10000
11387:
11388: % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
11389: % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
11390: % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
11391: % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
11392: %
11393: \def\setemergencystretch{%
11394: \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
11395: % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
11396: \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
11397: \else
11398: \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
11399: \fi
11400: }
11401:
11402: % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
11403: % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
11404: % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
11405: %
11406: % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
11407: % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
11408: %
11409: \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
11410: \voffset = #3\relax
11411: \topskip = #6\relax
11412: \splittopskip = \topskip
11413: %
11414: \vsize = #1\relax
11415: \advance\vsize by \topskip
11416: \txipageheight = \vsize
11417: %
11418: \hsize = #2\relax
11419: \txipagewidth = \hsize
11420: %
11421: \normaloffset = #4\relax
11422: \bindingoffset = #5\relax
11423: %
11424: \ifpdf
11425: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
11426: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
11427: % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
11428: % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
11429: \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
11430: \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
11431: \else
11432: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
11433: \special{papersize=#8,#7}%
11434: \else
11435: \pdfpageheight #7\relax
11436: \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
11437: % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin.
11438: \fi
11439: \fi
11440: %
11441: \setleading{\textleading}
11442: %
11443: \parindent = \defaultparindent
11444: \setemergencystretch
11445: }
11446:
11447: % @letterpaper (the default).
11448: \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
11449: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
11450: \textleading = 13.2pt
11451: %
11452: % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
11453: \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
11454: {\voffset}{.25in}%
11455: {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
11456: {11in}{8.5in}%
11457: }}
11458:
11459: % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
11460: \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
11461: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
11462: \textleading = 12pt
11463: %
11464: \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
11465: {-.2in}{0in}%
11466: {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
11467: {9.25in}{7in}%
11468: %
11469: \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
11470: \tolerance = 700
11471: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
11472: \defbodyindent = .5cm
11473: }}
11474:
11475: % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
11476: \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
11477: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
11478: \textleading = 13.2pt
11479: %
11480: % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
11481: % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
11482: % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
11483: % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
11484: % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
11485: % your texinfo source file like this:
11486: % @tex
11487: % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
11488: % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
11489: % @end tex
11490: \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
11491: {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
11492: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
11493: {297mm}{210mm}%
11494: %
11495: \tolerance = 700
11496: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
11497: \defbodyindent = 5mm
11498: }}
11499:
11500: % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
11501: % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
11502: % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
11503: \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
11504: \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
11505: \textleading = 12.5pt
11506: %
11507: \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
11508: {\voffset}{-11.4mm}%
11509: {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
11510: {210mm}{148mm}%
11511: %
11512: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
11513: \tolerance = 800
11514: \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
11515: \defbodyindent = 2mm
11516: \tableindent = 12mm
11517: }}
11518:
11519: % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
11520: \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
11521: \afourpaper
11522: \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
11523: {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
11524: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
11525: {297mm}{210mm}%
11526: %
11527: % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
11528: \globaldefs = 0
11529: }}
11530:
11531: % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
11532: \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
11533: \afourpaper
11534: \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
11535: {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
11536: {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
11537: {297mm}{210mm}%
11538: \globaldefs = 0
11539: }}
11540:
11541: \def\bsixpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
11542: \afourpaper
11543: \internalpagesizes{140mm}{100mm}%
11544: {-6.35mm}{-12.7mm}%
11545: {\bindingoffset}{14pt}%
11546: {176mm}{125mm}%
11547: \let\SETdispenvsize=\smallword
11548: \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
11549: \globaldefs = 0
11550: }}
11551:
11552:
11553: % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
11554: % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
11555: % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
11556: %
11557: \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
11558: \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
11559: \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
11560: \globaldefs = 1
11561: %
11562: \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
11563: \setleading{\textleading}%
11564: %
11565: \dimen0 = #1\relax
11566: \advance\dimen0 by 2.5in % default 1in margin above heading line
11567: % and 1.5in to include heading, footing and
11568: % bottom margin
11569: %
11570: \dimen2 = \hsize
11571: \advance\dimen2 by 2in % default to 1 inch margin on each side
11572: %
11573: \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
11574: {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
11575: {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
11576: {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
11577: }}
11578:
11579: % Set default to letter.
11580: %
11581: \letterpaper
11582:
11583: % Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes.
11584: \hfuzz = 1pt
11585:
11586:
11587: \message{microtype,}
11588:
11589: % protrusion, from Thanh's protcode.tex.
11590: \def\mtsetprotcode#1{%
11591: \rpcode#1`\!=200 \rpcode#1`\,=700 \rpcode#1`\-=700 \rpcode#1`\.=700
11592: \rpcode#1`\;=500 \rpcode#1`\:=500 \rpcode#1`\?=200
11593: \rpcode#1`\'=700
11594: \rpcode#1 34=500 % ''
11595: \rpcode#1 123=300 % --
11596: \rpcode#1 124=200 % ---
11597: \rpcode#1`\)=50 \rpcode#1`\A=50 \rpcode#1`\F=50 \rpcode#1`\K=50
11598: \rpcode#1`\L=50 \rpcode#1`\T=50 \rpcode#1`\V=50 \rpcode#1`\W=50
11599: \rpcode#1`\X=50 \rpcode#1`\Y=50 \rpcode#1`\k=50 \rpcode#1`\r=50
11600: \rpcode#1`\t=50 \rpcode#1`\v=50 \rpcode#1`\w=50 \rpcode#1`\x=50
11601: \rpcode#1`\y=50
11602: %
11603: \lpcode#1`\`=700
11604: \lpcode#1 92=500 % ``
11605: \lpcode#1`\(=50 \lpcode#1`\A=50 \lpcode#1`\J=50 \lpcode#1`\T=50
11606: \lpcode#1`\V=50 \lpcode#1`\W=50 \lpcode#1`\X=50 \lpcode#1`\Y=50
11607: \lpcode#1`\v=50 \lpcode#1`\w=50 \lpcode#1`\x=50 \lpcode#1`\y=0
11608: %
11609: \mtadjustprotcode#1\relax
11610: }
11611:
11612: \newcount\countC
11613: \def\mtadjustprotcode#1{%
11614: \countC=0
11615: \loop
11616: \ifcase\lpcode#1\countC\else
11617: \mtadjustcp\lpcode#1\countC
11618: \fi
11619: \ifcase\rpcode#1\countC\else
11620: \mtadjustcp\rpcode#1\countC
11621: \fi
11622: \advance\countC 1
11623: \ifnum\countC < 256 \repeat
11624: }
11625:
11626: \newcount\countB
11627: \def\mtadjustcp#1#2#3{%
11628: \setbox\boxA=\hbox{%
11629: \ifx#2\font\else#2\fi
11630: \char#3}%
11631: \countB=\wd\boxA
11632: \multiply\countB #1#2#3\relax
11633: \divide\countB \fontdimen6 #2\relax
11634: #1#2#3=\countB\relax
11635: }
11636:
11637: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
11638: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
11639: \ifpdf % pdfTeX
11640: \mtsetprotcode\textrm
11641: \def\mtfontexpand#1{\pdffontexpand#1 20 20 1 autoexpand\relax}
11642: \else % TeX
11643: \def\mtfontexpand#1{}
11644: \fi
11645: \else % LuaTeX
11646: \mtsetprotcode\textrm
11647: \def\mtfontexpand#1{\expandglyphsinfont#1 20 20 1\relax}
11648: \fi
11649: \else % XeTeX
11650: \mtsetprotcode\textrm
11651: \def\mtfontexpand#1{}
11652: \fi
11653:
11654:
11655: \newif\ifmicrotype
11656:
11657: \def\microtypeON{%
11658: \microtypetrue
11659: %
11660: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
11661: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
11662: \ifpdf % pdfTeX
11663: \pdfadjustspacing=2
11664: \pdfprotrudechars=2
11665: \fi
11666: \else % LuaTeX
11667: \adjustspacing=2
11668: \protrudechars=2
11669: \fi
11670: \else % XeTeX
11671: \XeTeXprotrudechars=2
11672: \fi
11673: %
11674: \mtfontexpand\textrm
11675: \mtfontexpand\textsl
11676: \mtfontexpand\textbf
11677: }
11678:
11679: \def\microtypeOFF{%
11680: \microtypefalse
11681: %
11682: \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
11683: \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
11684: \ifpdf % pdfTeX
11685: \pdfadjustspacing=0
11686: \pdfprotrudechars=0
11687: \fi
11688: \else % LuaTeX
11689: \adjustspacing=0
11690: \protrudechars=0
11691: \fi
11692: \else % XeTeX
11693: \XeTeXprotrudechars=0
11694: \fi
11695: }
11696:
11697: \microtypeOFF
11698:
11699: \parseargdef\microtype{%
11700: \def\txiarg{#1}%
11701: \ifx\txiarg\onword
11702: \microtypeON
11703: \else\ifx\txiarg\offword
11704: \microtypeOFF
11705: \else
11706: \errhelp = \EMsimple
11707: \errmessage{Unknown @microtype option `\txiarg', must be on|off}%
11708: \fi\fi
11709: }
11710:
11711:
11712: \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
11713:
11714: % Make UTF-8 the default encoding.
11715: \documentencodingzzz{UTF-8}
11716:
11717: \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
11718: \catcode`\^^K = 10 % treat vertical tab as whitespace
11719:
11720: % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
11721: \catcode`\^^? = 14
11722:
11723: % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
11724: \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
11725: \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
11726: \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
11727: \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
11728: \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
11729: \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
11730: \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
11731: \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
11732: \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
11733:
11734: % Set catcodes for Texinfo file
11735:
11736: % Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
11737: % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
11738: % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
11739: %
11740: \catcode`\"=\active
11741: \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
11742: \let"=\activedoublequote
11743: \catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
11744: \chardef\hatchar=`\^
11745: \catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat
11746:
11747: \catcode`\_=\active
11748: \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
11749: \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
11750: \let\realunder=_
11751:
11752: \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}}
11753:
11754: \chardef \less=`\<
11755: \catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
11756: \chardef \gtr=`\>
11757: \catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
11758: \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
11759: \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
11760: \catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash
11761:
11762:
11763: % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
11764: % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
11765: \def\texinfochars{%
11766: \let< = \activeless
11767: \let> = \activegtr
11768: \let~ = \activetilde
11769: \let^ = \activehat
11770: \setregularquotes
11771: \let\b = \strong
11772: \let\i = \smartitalic
11773: % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
11774: }
11775:
11776: % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
11777: % parsing them.
11778: \def\turnoffactive{%
11779: \passthroughcharstrue
11780: \let-=\normaldash
11781: \let"=\normaldoublequote
11782: \let$=\normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
11783: \let+=\normalplus
11784: \let<=\normalless
11785: \let>=\normalgreater
11786: \let^=\normalcaret
11787: \let_=\normalunderscore
11788: \let|=\normalverticalbar
11789: \let~=\normaltilde
11790: \otherbackslash
11791: \setregularquotes
11792: \unsepspaces
11793: }
11794:
11795: % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
11796: % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
11797: % So turn them off again, and have \loadconf turn them back on.
11798: \catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other
11799:
11800:
11801: % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
11802: % as in \char`\\.
11803: \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
11804:
11805: % Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use
11806: % \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
11807: % of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
11808: % font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
11809: % sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
11810: % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
11811: % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
11812: % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
11813:
11814: \def\ttbackslash{{\tt \ifmmode \mathchar29020 \else \backslashcurfont \fi}}
11815: \let\backslashchar = \ttbackslash % \backslashchar{} is for user documents.
11816:
11817: % These are made active for url-breaking, so need
11818: % active definitions as the normal characters.
11819: \def\normaldot{.}
11820: \def\normalquest{?}
11821: \def\normalslash{/}
11822:
11823: % \newlinesloadsconf - call \loadconf as soon as possible in the
11824: % file, e.g. at the first newline.
11825: %
11826: {\catcode`\^=7
11827: \catcode`\^^M=13
11828: \gdef\newlineloadsconf{%
11829: \catcode`\^^M=13 %
11830: \newlineloadsconfzz%
11831: }
11832: \gdef\newlineloadsconfzz#1^^M{%
11833: \def\c{\loadconf\c}%
11834: % Definition for the first newline read in the file
11835: \def ^^M{\loadconf}%
11836: % In case the first line has a whole-line or environment command on it
11837: \let\originalparsearg\parsearg%
11838: \def\parsearg{\loadconf\originalparsearg}%
11839: %
11840: % \startenvironment is in the expansion of commands defined with \envdef
11841: \let\originalstartenvironment\startenvironment%
11842: \def\startenvironment{\loadconf\startenvironment}%
11843: }}
11844:
11845:
11846: % Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
11847: % appears by mistake.
11848: {\catcode`\^=7 \catcode13=13%
11849: \gdef\enableemergencynewline{%
11850: \gdef^^M{%
11851: \par%
11852: %<warning: active newline>\par%
11853: }}}
11854:
11855:
11856: % \loadconf gets called at the beginning of every Texinfo file.
11857: % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. Useful for site-wide
11858: % @afourpaper, etc. Not opening texinfo.cnf directly in texinfo.tex
11859: % makes it possible to make a format file for Texinfo.
11860: %
11861: \gdef\loadconf{%
11862: \relax % Terminate the filename if running as "tex '&texinfo' FILE.texi".
11863: %
11864: % Turn off the definitions that trigger \loadconf
11865: \everyjobreset
11866: \catcode13=5 % regular end of line
11867: \enableemergencynewline
11868: \let\c=\comment
11869: \let\parsearg\originalparsearg
11870: \let\startenvironment\originalstartenvironment
11871: %
11872: % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
11873: % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
11874: \catcode`+=\active
11875: \catcode`\_=\active
11876: %
11877: \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
11878: \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
11879: \closein 1
11880: }
11881:
11882: % Redefine some control sequences to be controlled by the \ifdummies
11883: % and \ifindexnofonts switches. Do this at the end so that the control
11884: % sequences are all defined.
11885: \definedummies
11886:
11887:
11888:
11889:
11890: \catcode`\@=0
11891:
11892: % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
11893: {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
11894:
11895: % In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
11896: % in fixed width font.
11897: \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on.
11898:
11899: @let\ = @ttbackslash
11900:
11901: % If in a .fmt file, print the version number.
11902: % \eatinput stops the `\input texinfo' from showing up.
11903: % After that, `\' should revert to printing a backslash.
11904: % Turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
11905: % they might have appeared in the input file name.
11906: %
11907: @everyjob{@message{[Texinfo version @texinfoversion]}%
11908: @global@let\ = @eatinput
11909: @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
11910:
11911: {@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13%
11912: @gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@loadconf}}
11913:
11914: @def@everyjobreset{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi}
11915:
11916: % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
11917: % catcode other.
11918: @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
11919:
11920: % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
11921: % the literal character `\'.
11922: %
11923: {@catcode`- = @active
11924: @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
11925: @turnoffactive
11926: @let\=@ttbackslash
11927: }
11928: }
11929:
11930: % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
11931: @escapechar = `@@
11932:
11933: % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
11934: % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
11935: @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
11936: @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
11937: @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
11938:
11939: @let @hashchar = @normalhash
11940:
11941: @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
11942: @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
11943: @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
11944: @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
11945: @catcode`@'=@active
11946: @catcode`@`=@active
11947:
11948: @c Local variables:
11949: @c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp nil t)
11950: @c time-stamp-pattern: "texinfoversion{%Y-%02m-%02d.%02H}"
11951: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
11952: @c End:
11953:
11954: @newlineloadsconf
FreeBSD-CVSweb <freebsd-cvsweb@FreeBSD.org>
![[BACK]](/cvsweb/icons/back.gif){kind=icon}
Return to texinfo.tex CVS log ![[TXT]](/cvsweb/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
![[DIR]](/cvsweb/icons/dir.gif){kind=icon}
Up to [Coherent Logic Development] / freem / doc